DCS JF-17 Thunder Guide

DCS GUIDE
JF-17 THUNDER BLOCK 1

BY CHUCK
LAST UPDATED: 15/02/2022
1
DISCLAIMER
This document has been created for recreational purposes only. Do not use for training or real life flying.
The author of this document has never had access to restricted or classified documentation on the JF-17. The author has never had access
to OEM (Original Equipment Manufacturer) data related to the JF-17, its armament systems nor its defensive systems. All the
information within this document is taken from public documentation (i.e. JF-17 Early Access Manual by Deka Ironwork) and non-
official tutorials (player-made videos on Youtube).
The procedures listed in this document are deliberately simplified for gameplay purposes due to the limitations of the DCS World
simulation environment and the limitations of the DCS JF-17 module by Deka Ironwork.
This document is merely a free, personal project that is used for entertainment. This document is not meant nor designed to teach
someone to fly a real JF-17.
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
• PART 1 – INTRODUCTION
• PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP
• PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT
• PART 4 – KITS & OPTIONS
• PART 5 – START-UP PROCEDURE
• PART 6 – TAXI & TAKEOFF
• PART 7 – LANDING
• PART 8 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT
• PART 9 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS
• PART 10 – HOTAS
• PART 11 – RADAR & SENSORS
• PART 12 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT
• PART 13 – DEFENCE: RWR AND COUNTERMEASURES
• PART 14 – DATALINK & IFF
• PART 15 – RADIO TUTORIAL
• PART 16 – FCS & AUTOPILOT
• PART 17 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING
• PART 18 – AIRCRAFT OPERATION TIPS
• PART 19 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING
• PART 20 – OTHER RESOURCES
Special thanks to Paul "Goldwolf" Whittingham for creating the guide icons. 3
The PAC JF-17 Thunder is a lightweight, single-engine, multi-role combat
aircraft developed jointly by the Pakistan Aeronautical Complex (PAC) and
the Chengdu Aircraft Corporation (CAC) of China. The JF-17 can be used for aerial
reconnaissance, ground attack and aircraft interception. Its designation "JF-17"
THUNDER
by Pakistan is short for "Joint Fighter-17", while the designation and name "FC-1
Xiaolong" by China means "Fighter China-1 Fierce Dragon". The JF-17 is to become
JF-17
the backbone of the Pakistan Air Force (PAF), complementing the General Dynamics
F-16 Fighting Falcon at half the cost. The PAF inducted its first JF-17 squadron in
February 2010.
The JF-17 was primarily developed to meet the Pakistan Air Force requirement for
an affordable, modern, multi-role combat aircraft as a replacement for its large
fleet of Dassault Mirage III/5 fighters, Nanchang A-5 bombers, and Chengdu F-
7 interceptors, with a cost of 500 million USD, divided equally between China and
Pakistan.
By 1989, because of economic sanctions by the US, Pakistan had abandoned Project
Sabre II, a design study involving US aircraft manufacturer Grumman and China, and
had decided to redesign and upgrade the Chengdu F-7. In the same year, China and
Grumman started a new design study to develop the Super 7, another redesigned
Chengdu F-7. The initial design of the Super 7 was originally an improved, modified
version of the J-7/F-7, which was a copy of the MiG-21 Fishbed.
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION
4
Grumman left the project when sanctions were placed on China following the political fallout from the 1989 Tiananmen Square protests. After Grumman left the Chengdu Super 7 project, the
Fighter China project was launched in 1991. In 1995, Pakistan and China signed a memorandum of understanding (MoU) for joint design and development of a new fighter, and over the next
few years worked out the project details. In June 1995, Mikoyan had joined the project to provide "design support", this also involved the secondment of several engineers by CAC.
THUNDER
JF-17
5
The Thunder has a complex DNA; it integrates many technologies from existing aircraft; a
cannon from a MiG-21, an engine derived from a MiG-29’s, and various sets of avionics and
HOTAS similar to the F-16’s, which facilitated the transition of Pakistani pilots flying F-16s.The
JF-17 has a bubble canopy with a great view, a strake-wing layout and advanced avionics that
THUNDER
allow the use of very modern armament like precision-guided munitions, laser-guided
rockets, anti-ship, Man-In-The-Loop cruise missiles, and much more. The KLJ-7 radar provides
JF-17
excellent air to ground, air-to-sea and air-to-air capability. The WMD-7 targeting pod is a
useful tool to define a SPI (“Sensor Point of Interest”) that can be used by other sensors as
well. Although the Joint Fighter is relatively small and nimble when compared to modern
fighter jets. Keep in mind that size isn’t everything when functionality and mission versatility
are considered. This functionality is noticeable with the impressive array of Chinese and
western ordnance available, but it also extends to the cockpit itself, which consists mainly of
three digital displays that contain dozens of sub-menus. On top of all these bells and whistles,
a functioning DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) is a very nice touch that allows you to use preset
countermeasure programs, flight plans and even weapon programs like the complex CM-
802AKG missile.
6
The Deka Ironwork team simulated the most modern fighter jet in DCS World so far. The Fierce Dragon has a rich heritage and will very likely become a formidable ally to have on your wing… or
THUNDER a foe to be reckoned with on multiplayer servers.
JF-17
7
JF-17
PART 1 – INTRODUCTION THUNDER
8
Note: In your controls, make sure you check your “Trim” controls since the default version of the game has your trim hat set to changing your view rather than trim the
THUNDER aircraft. Since most of you are probably equipped with a TRACKIR already, I suggest you make sure the Trim Hat Switch is set up properly.
JF-17
To assign axis, click on Axis Assign. You can also

select “Axis Commands” in the upper scrolling
menu.
PART 2 – CONTROLS SETUP
To modify curves and sensitivities of axes, click

on the axis you want to modify and then click
on “Axis Tune”.
9
Bind the following axes:
• PITCH (DEADZONE AT 1, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 5)
• ROLL (DEADZONE AT 1, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 5)

THUNDER
• RUDDER (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 0)

JF-17
• THRUST – CONTROLS ENGINE RPM
• TDC SLEW HORIZONTAL
• TDC SLEW VERTICAL
• T6_AXIS VERTICAL ANTENNA
• WHEEL BRAKE LEFT / RIGHT

10
THUNDER
WHAT YOU NEED MAPPED
S5 – Change Weapon Station/NWS
JF-17
S6 UP – Trim Nose DOWN

(Grey button on RHS) S6 RIGHT – Trim RIGHT
S6 DOWN – Trim Nose UP
S6 LEFT – Trim LEFT S2 (Sensor Control) UP
S2 (Sensor Control) RIGHT
S2 (Sensor Control) DOWN
ZOOM IN SLOW S2 (Sensor Control) LEFT
S3: Weapon Release

Weapon Launch
T5 (TDC) Press (ENTER) T6 Axis: Antenna Elevation
ZOOM OUT SLOW
S2 (Sensor Control) PRESS
S4: Fire Main Gun
S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. FWD T4 FWD – Radio COMM1

S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. RIGHT S T2 PRESS (PL-E5 CAGE/UNCAGE)

S S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. AFT S T4 AFT – Radio COMM2
S S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. LEFT T4 PRESS – IFF Interrogation TDC SLEW VERTICAL
TDC SLEW HORIZONTAL
TDC SLEW VERTICAL
TDC SLEW HORIZONTAL
S8 – Change Weapons T3 FWD – Speed Brake ON
T3 AFT – Speed Brake OFF T1 BACK (MMS AG)

T1 CENTER (MMS NAV)
T1 FWD (MMS INTC)
S7 – Autopilot OFF
T2 AFT – Countermeasures Dispense

T2 FWD – SPJ Standby/Jam
+ TOE BRAKES (MAPPED ON PEDALS) 11

JF-17
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT THUNDER
12
JF-17
13
JF-17
14
Flood Light Gasper
THUNDER
JF-17
Flashlight
(Click to Use)
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT
15
Canopy Status Indicator
THUNDER
JF-17
Canopy Open/Close Handle
Canopy Closed & Sealed Mark
Canopy Close Mark

Canopy Seal Handle Canopy Manual Crank
• Fwd: ON Canopy Open Mark
• Aft: OFF Canopy Stop Mark 16
THUNDER Flood Light Control Knob
Formation Light Selector Knob

OFF / 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / BRT: Brightness settings
JF-17
Anti-Collision/Tow Light Switch

Console Light Control Knob • Tow: when aircraft is being towed, dims the
navigation lights and puts them to steady mode
• OFF
• Anti-Collision
Anti-Collision Light Selector Knob

1 / 2 / 3 / 4: Flash pattern settings per
cycle
Instrument Lights Control Knob
Navigation (Position) Lights Mode

Control Switch
• Flash
• Steady
Navigation (Position) Lights DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge)

Brightness Control Switch
• Bright Exterior Lights
• OFF Master Switch
• Dim
Air-to-Air Refueling
Probe Light Switch
Air-to-Air Refueling Probe Light DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge)

Brightness Control Knob Eject Button 17
Speaker Control Box
Radio Upper/Lower Channel Antenna Switch
Antenna Switch
THUNDER
JF-17
Intercom Switch
Missile Volume Control Knob
COM1 Radio Volume Control Knob ECS (Environmental Control

System) Mode Selector
ACP: Audio Control Panel

Defog Button
COM2 Radio Volume Control Knob
TCN/ILS (TACAN/Instrument Landing

System) Volume Knob
Landing Gear Override Handle
Air Temperature Control Selector
18
AAP Brightness Knob
INS (Inertial Navigation

THUNDER
System) Mode Knob Selector

• STBY (Standby) HUD (Heads-Up Display)
JF-17
• FAST (Quick Alignment) Symbology Reject/Declutter Switch

• INS NAV
• GC
HUD/MFCD (Heads-Up
Display/Multifunction Colored
Display) Day/Night Switch
AAP (Avionics
Activation Panel)
19
THUNDER
AAP (Avionics Activation Panel) Buttons

JF-17
ACMI
Air Combat Manoeuvering
---------- ---------- ----------
Instrumentation (Flight
Data Recorder).
HMD SPJ CLDP IRST

Helmet-Mounted Display. Self-Protection Jammer. Convertible Laser Designator Infrared Search & Track.
Not functional on this Pod. Required to operate Not functional on this aircraft
aircraft variant. targeting pod and fire laser. variant.
RDR SLNK OESP RWR

Radar power. SD Missile Link / command Optical/Electronic Self- Radar Warning Receiver
transmitter. Protection
Countermeasures.
COM1 COM2 NAV IFF

COM1 VHF Radio. COM2 UHF Radio. Navigation System. Identify-Friend-or-Foe System.
INS WMMC1 WMMC2 SAIU

Inertial Navigation Weapon Mission Weapon Mission Standard Armament Interface
System. Management Computer 1. Management Computer 2. Unit.
Legend: COMBAT TRAIN

Green buttons are activated automatically Combat mode activates all Training mode activates avionic
once COMBAT button is selected only. avionic systems required for systems required for normal
air combat. flight; combat-specific avionics
are not activated.
Orange buttons are activated automatically
once either TRAIN or COMBAT button is
selected.
Blue buttons are activated automatically when

the TRAINING button is selected only.
20
Warning Panel Day/Night Switch
Warning Panel Brightness Knob
THUNDER
JF-17
Oxygen Flow Indicator
Oxygen Indicator Brightness Knob

Warning Panel Test Button
DC Generator Switch
Main AC Generator Switch
Battery Switch
21
THUNDER
JF-17
Warning Lights
OXY LOW CANOPY HYD LOW
---------- Oxygen tank level is low. Canopy is not sealed. Low hydraulic pressure
detected
AIR DATA LOW FUEL CABIN PRESS REDUCE RPM

Air data system Low fuel level is detected. Cabin pressure decrease is Engine RPM is reduced.
malfunction detected. detected.
CONFIG FUEL PUMP AC SYS OIL

Aircraft Flight Control Fuel pump malfunction is Main AC electrical system Low oil pressure detected
System configuration detected. malfunction is detected.
switch error is detected.
DL START PUMP DC GEN STARTER

Direct link Flight Control DC electric pump DC generator malfunction Engine starter malfunction
System configuration malfunction is detected. is detected.
mode is selected.
FCS 3 BRAKE BATT ENG TEMP

Flight Control System level Brake malfunction is Battery malfunction is Engine temperature overheat
3 status. detected. detected. detected.
22
THUNDER
JF-17
Caution Lights
FCS 2 ANTI-SKID TRU ANTI-SURGE
Flight Control System level Anti-skid system malfunction Transformer Rectifier Unit Anti-surge valve malfunction
2 status. is detected. malfunction is detected. detected.
FCS 1 NWS STATIC INV ANTI-ICING

Flight Control System level Nosewheel steering system Static inverter malfunction Anti-icing system malfunction
1 status.. malfunction is detected. is detected. detected.
ROLL CAS ECS EMMC SEC

Roll CAS (Control Environment control system EMMC (Electro Mechanical Secondary engine control
Augmentation System) is malfunction is detected. Management Computer) malfunction is detected.
OFF. malfunction is detected.
YAW CAS EQUIP HOT LWC EDU

Yaw CAS (Control Equipment overheat Warning light malfunction Engine Diagnostic Unit –
Augmentation System) is detected. detected. Engine Controller / Regulator
OFF. Failure detected
AUTOPILOT PITOT HEAT AVIONS DEEC

Autopilot is OFF. Pitot tube heater Avionics malfunction Digital electronic engine
malfunction detected. detected. control malfunction is
detected.
EFCS SEAT
EFCS (Emergency Flight Ejection seat safety is ON.
Control System)
malfunction is detected.
23
THUNDER
JF-17
Magnetic Compass
Barometric Pressure
Setting Knob
Clock
Emergency Pneumatic System

Pressure Indicator (x100 psi)
Oxygen Pressure
Indicator (x100 psi) Main Pneumatic System
24
Pressure Indicator (x100 psi)
Clock
THUNDER
ON/OFF Switch Clock Brightness

JF-17
Decrease Button
Local Time
Clock Brightness
Increase Button
UTC Time / CHR (Stopwatch) Time
CHR (Chronometer) / Stopwatch Button

• First Press: Sets the UTC / CHR Field to 00:00:00
• Second Press: Starts chronometer/stopwatch

• Third Press: Stops chronometer/stopwatch from incrementing.
• Fourth Press: Resets UTC / CHR Field to 00:00:00
UTC (Zulu) Time Button

• Sets the UTC / CHR Field to UTC
(Universal Coordinated Time)
25
JF-17
26
THUNDER
JF-17
Status Lights
PITCH TRIM ROLL TRIM YAW TRIM
Pitch trim neutral position. Roll trim neutral position. Yaw trim neutral position.
A/A A/G1 A/G2 EFCS

Air-to-Air Flight Control System Air-to-Ground 1 Flight Control Air-to-Ground 2 Flight Control Emergency Flight Control System
Configuration Selected System Configuration Selected System Configuration Selected is ON.
NO.3 TANK NO.1 TANK WING D/T CTR D/T

No. 3 fuel tank empty. No. 1 fuel tank empty. Wing drop tank empty. Center drop tank empty. ----------
START AB COMBAT EMG HYD NWS ADVISORY

Engine start is active. Afterburner is ON. Combat mode is active. Emergency hydraulic pump is ON. Nosewheel Steering is ON. SHARS (Strapped-down Heading
Attitude Reference System) malfunction
is detected.
27
Horizon Line
HUD (Heads-Up Display) Waypoint Steering Cue (Tadpole)
Heading
THUNDER
Waypoint Symbol
Total Fuel Quantity Indicator (lbs)
Angle of Attack (deg)
JF-17
Vertical Speed (x100 ft/min)

Acceleration (G)
Barometric Altitude (ft AMSL,
Above Mean Sea Level)
Flight Path Marker
Airspeed (kts)
• C: Calibrated Airspeed Selected on UFCP Radar Altitude (ft AGL, Above Ground Level)
• T: True Airspeed Selected on UFCP
ΔT: Time difference between arrival

Mach time to Waypoint and current time
A: Flight Plan Number

02: Waypoint Number Selected
10.6: Distance to Waypoint (nm)
Master Mode Selected
Peak (Maximum) Aircraft G Boresight Cross Clock

Master Arm Status
recorded during Flight
Roll Bank Angle Indicator
Pitch Ladder (deg)
28
EFIS Page
Pitch Ladder
THUNDER
JF-17
Angle of Attack (deg)

Heading Tape
Glideslope Deviation Scale
Localizer Deviation Scale
Airspeed (kts)
Vertical Speed
(x100 ft/min)
Mach
Altitude (ft)
Barometric Pressure Setting (in Hg)
Bank Angle
29
Canopy Detonation Cord Mirror
THUNDER Detonates to shatter canopy to allow pilot ejection
JF-17
Mirror
Mirror
30
UFCP Data Field Select Buttons
UFCP (Up-Front Control Panel (L1 to L4) UFCP Data Field Select Buttons
(R1 to R4)
THUNDER
UFCP Keypad and Priority

Functions
JF-17
UFCP Priority Functions

HUD (Heads-Up Display) UFCP Data Display Fields

Contrast Knob
HUD (Heads-Up Display)

Brightness Knob
UFCP (Up-Front Control
Panel) Brightness Knob
UFCP +/./- Fast Select Rocker Switch
Used to increase/decrease value selected in Data Display Fields. Short click
increases/decreases by one, holding click continuously increases/decreases value. HUD Standby/Backup
Right Click: UP (+) Reticle Knob
Left Click: DOWN (-) 31
Switch springs back to Middle (.) position
THUNDER
UFCP Keypad & Priority Functions

JF-17
• PFL: Pilot Fault List displayed on MFCD

• VRC: Video Recorder settings UFCP Priority Functions
• DST: Destination Information display on
UFCP and DST page on MFCD. • OAP: Offset Aiming Point Configuration Data
• TOT: Time on Target Data display on UFCP display on UFCP
• TOD: Time of Day & Date Data display on • MRK: Creates markpoint
UFCP • P.U.: Position Update, used to re-align
• FUL: Fuel Data display on UFCP Inertial Navigation System in-air
• IFF: Identify-Friend-or-Foe System • HNS: Hybrid Navigation System, allows use of
information displayed on UFCP both GPS and INS, or INS only.

• A/P: Autopilot Mode Selector
• 0-9: Keypad • FPM: Flight Path Marker cage/uncage
function on HUD. Useful for high crosswind
• RTN: Return Button displays Main UFCP page situations where the FPM may move out of
the HUD.
32
Main UFCP Function
THUNDER
FP-A: Flight Plan A Selected

JF-17
CAS: Toggles speed value between CAS 01: Waypoint 1 Selected

(Calibrated Airspeed) and TAS (True Airspeed)
Waypoint Update AUTO/MANUAL Setting: Toggles

Waypoint switching automatically to the next waypoint
COM1 Radio Preset Channel when aircraft is less than 2 nm from selected waypoint
COM2 Radio Preset Channel


• RTN: Return Button displays Main UFCP page
33
THUNDER
JF-17
Main UFCP Function DST UFCP Function TOD UFCP Function IFF UFCP Function

• PFL: Pilot Fault List displayed on MFCD
• VRC: Video Recorder settings
• DST: Destination Information display on
UFCP and DST page on MFCD.
• TOT: Time on Target Data display on UFCP
• TOD: Time of Day & Date Data display on
UFCP
• FUL: Fuel Data display on UFCP
• IFF: Identify-Friend-or-Foe System
information displayed on UFCP
• 0-9: Keypad
VRC UFCP Function TOT UFCP Function FUEL UFCP Function
• RTN: Return Button displays Main UFCP page
34
THUNDER
JF-17
OAP UFCP Function P.U. UFCP Function A/P UFCP Function

UFCP Priority Functions

• OAP: Offset Aiming Point Configuration Data display on UFCP
• MRK: Creates markpoint
• P.U.: Position Update, used to re-align Inertial Navigation System in-air
• HNS: Hybrid Navigation System, allows use of both GPS and INS, or INS only.
• A/P: Autopilot Mode Selector
• FPM: Flight Path Marker cage/uncage function on HUD. Useful for high
crosswind situations where the FPM may move out of the HUD.
MRK UFCP Function HNS UFCP Function
35
THUNDER
JF-17
Center MFCD (Multifunction

Colored Display)
Right MFCD (Multifunction

Colored Display)
Left MFCD (Multifunction

Colored Display)
36
MFCD OSBs
(Option Select Button, U1 to U5)
THUNDER
MFCD Symbology Brightness Control

JF-17
MFCD (Multifunction Colored

Display) Power Knob
ON/OFF
MFCD OSBs
(Option Select Button, R1 to R8)
MFCD OSBs
(Option Select Button, L1 to L8)
MFCD Brightness Control
MFCD Contrast Control

MFCD OSBs
37
(Option Select Button, D1 to D5)
THUNDER
MFCD (Multifunction Colored Display)
Upper Menus
• HSD: Horizontal Situation Display
JF-17
• EFIS: Electronic Flight Instrument System

• CLNK: Datalink Group Setting
• DATA (See Sub-pages)
• RLS: Stores latest 10 ordnance release operations
• NAV: Navigation Data
• AS: Air-to-Surface Settings (Bombs)
• FUEL: Fuel data
• DST: Destination data
• FCS: Flight Control System
• ENG: Engines data

• DTC: Data Transfer Cartridge
• RDR: Radar
• INS: Inertial Navigation System
• TACAN: Tactical Air Navigation Navaid
• APR: Approach
• POD: Targeting Pod
SMS (Stores Management • SMS: Stores Management System
System) Page • BIT: Built-In Test
Quick Access Button • CHKLS: Checklists (Not Implemented)
CMBT (Combat) Page • PFL: Pilot Failure List
Quick Access Button
Lower Menus
• AFD: Airfield Data
• SMS: Stores Management System
• EPI1: Engine Performance Indicator 1. Engine RPM (N2),
exhaust gas temperature (T4) and fuel quantity
Access Upper Page Main Access Lower Page Main • EPI2: Engine Performance Indicator 2. Hydraulic & brake
Menu by pressing this button Menu by pressing this button pressure. 38
HSD Page EFIS Page
THUNDER
Upper Menus
JF-17

• FUEL: Fuel data

• RDR: Radar
CLNK Page RDR Page • TACAN: Tactical Air Navigation Navaid
• APR: Approach
• BIT: Built-In Test
• CHKLS: Checklists (Not Implemented)
• PFL: Pilot Failure List
39
INS Page TACAN Page
THUNDER
Upper Menus
JF-17

• FUEL: Fuel data

• RDR: Radar
APR Page POD Page • TACAN: Tactical Air Navigation Navaid
• APR: Approach
40
SMS Page BIT Page
THUNDER
Upper Menus
JF-17

• FUEL: Fuel data

• RDR: Radar
CHKLS Page PFL Page • TACAN: Tactical Air Navigation Navaid
• APR: Approach
41
DATA Page RLS Sub-Page
THUNDER
Upper Menus
JF-17

• FUEL: Fuel data
NAV Sub-Page AS Sub-Page
42
FUEL Sub-Page DST Sub-Page
THUNDER
Upper Menus
JF-17

• FUEL: Fuel data
FCS Sub-Page ENG Sub-Page
43
DTC Sub-Page
THUNDER
Upper Menus
JF-17

• FUEL: Fuel data
44
Lower Menus
• AFD: Airfield Data
THUNDER
• EPI1: Engine Performance Indicator 1. Engine RPM (N2),

exhaust gas temperature (T4) and fuel quantity
JF-17
• EPI2: Engine Performance Indicator 2. Hydraulic & brake

pressure.
AFD Page SMS Page
EPI1 Page EPI2 Page
45
From any selected page, you can use the CMBT and
THUNDER
SMS Quick Access page.

JF-17
CMBT (Combat) Page SMS (Stores Management

Quick Access Button System) Page CMBT (Combat) Page Quick Access SMS (Stores Management System) Page Quick Access
Quick Access Button
46
Master Warning
(Push to Reset)
FCS (Flight Control
THUNDER
Engine Fire Warning

System) Failure Warning
JF-17
Emergency Brake Handle

47
THUNDER
JF-17
Deploy/Jettison Drag
Chute Switch
Backup SAIU (Standard Armament

Interface Unit) Knob Selector
• OFF
• BOMB
• IR (Infrared Missile)
• GUN
48
S/B (Speedbrake)
Deployed Light
THUNDER
Landing Gear In Transition Light

D/CH (Drag Chute)
JF-17
Deployed Light
Landing Gear
TEF (Trailing Edge Deployed Lights
Flaps) Deployed Light
Landing Gear Indicator Light

Test Button
Landing Gear Lever
Ground Jettison Button Weapon Master Arm Switch

• ARM
• OFF
• SIM (Simulate Training Mode)
Landing Gear Override

Button (with Cover)
Landing Gear Indicator Light
Emergency Jettison Button Brightness Knob
49
Brake Test Switch
THUNDER
Fuel Valve Feed

JF-17
Cutoff Switch
Parking Brake Switch

• PARK
• NORM Light Switch
• LAND (Landing)
• OFF
• TAXI
TEF (Trailing Edge Flap) Switch

• UP
• DOWN
Active Fuel Valve

Cutoff Switch
DC Electric Motor
Start Pump Switch
Air-to-Air Refueling Switch

• ALL TANKS
• OFF 50
• INT (Internal Tanks Only)
THUNDER
Throttle
JF-17
Throttle Stripe
Indicates Throttle Position
on Quadrant
Throttle Idle/Stop Caging Lever

AB (Afterburner) Detent
Throttle Emergency Button
Throttle Friction Lever

51
T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch) T4 Switch
• UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) • FWD: Radio PTT (Push-to-Talk) COMM1
• MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation) • AFT: Radio PTT (Push-to-Talk) COMM2
• DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground) • PRESS: IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) Interrogation Button
THUNDER
JF-17
T6: Radar Antenna

Elevation Switch
T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch

T2: Countermeasure Switch
• AFT: Chaff/Flare Dispense
T3: Speed Brake Switch
• PRESS: Cage-Uncage Missile Seeker
• FWD: Speed Brake Out (Deployed) • FWD: Self-Protection Jammer Toggle
• AFT: Speed Brake In (Retracted)
52
Engine Air Start Button
THUNDER
JF-17
Engine Mode Switch

• CMBT: Combat Mode, increases
maximum allowable power
• C+T: Normal Mode
• TRG: Training Mode, reduces maximum
allowable power to reduce engine wear
A/B (Afterburner) Switch

ENG CTRL (Engine Control) Switch

• ON/OFF
Engine Ground Start Button
SEC (Secondary Engine Control) Switch
Engine Start Mode Selector

• FWD: STARTER COLD (Turbo Starter Anti-Surge Switch
Dry Crank)
• MIDDLE: START (initiates Turbo
Starter cranking sequence, then
initiates Engine start sequence).
• AFT: ENG COLD (Engine Dry Crank) 53
Yaw Trim Control Switch
Record Switch
THUNDER
JF-17
Yaw/Roll CAS (Control

Augmentation System) Switch
EFCS (Emergency Flight

Control System) Switch
FCS BIT (Built-In Test) Button

FCS (Flight Control System) Direct

Flight Test Switch 1 Mode Switch
Note: Direct Mode is inhibited if Angle
Flight Test Switch 2 of Attack is within limits. Direct Mode is
only to be used for spin recovery in case
of a FCS malfunction.
FCS (Flight Control System)

Reset Button
AA/AG (Air-to-Air/Air-to-
AG1/AG2 Flight Control System Configuration Mode Switch
• AG1: Air-to-Ground Configuration 1: Weapons are mounted Ground) Flight Control System
without external wing-mounted fuel tanks Configuration Mode Switch
• AG2: Air-to-Ground Configuration 2: Weapons are mounted with
wing-mounted external fuel tanks
• Be careful: FCS G limit of AG2 is 5g and limit of AG1 is 6g.
However, some munitions have a structural limit of 5.5g, and
the FCS config will still recommend AG1. Choose wisely.
54
CSS (Canopy Severance
Oxygen Supply Valve
System) Handle
THUNDER
JF-17
Ejection Seat
Arming Handle
G-Suit Tube Connector
Ejection Seat EMG

(Emergency) Oxygen Switch
Oxygen Selector
• AFT: O2 N (Normal)
• FWD: 100 % O2 (Emergency)
Oxygen Tube Connector
55
Radio Volume Knob
Radio Squelch Switch

• OFF
Radio Frequency Display
THUNDER
• SQL (Squelch)
• ACKN (Acknowledge)
JF-17
R&S M3AR V/UHF Radio Mode Switch

• ZRO: Function Not Available.
• OFF
Radio Control Handover Switch
• TR: Transmit-Receive
• TR+G: Transmit-Receive + Guard Frequency
• ADF: Automatic Directional Finder (Function Not
Available)
• GD: Emergency Guard Frequency (243.000 MHz
UHF / 121.500 MHz VHF)
• SET: can be used to initiate the Built-In Test (BIT),
change the preset set, view/change the preset

assignment and view/change the general setting.
Flare Jettison Button Radio Keys
Emergency Hydraulic Pump Switch
SHARS (Strapped-down Heading Attitude

Ejection Seat Activate Reference System) Switch
Zeroizer Switch
P.H. (Pitot Heat) Test Switch

Zeroizer (Self-Destruct) Button
56
JF-17
57
JF-17
Ejection Seat Firing Handle
58
S5: Missile Step Button/NWS
THUNDER (Nosewheel Steering) Control Button
S3: Weapon Launch/Release

Button
JF-17
S9: Automatic HUD

Video Recording Button
S4: Gun Trigger

S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch S8: Missile Type Selection Button
S6: Trim Switch

S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch S7: Autopilot Disengage Switch
59
JF-17
HUD (Heads-Up Display) Recorder
60
JF-17
61
THUNDER
Speedbrake
JF-17
Speedbrake
Drag Chute
Flaps
Speedbrake
Speedbrake
62
THUNDER
JF-17
Taxi Light
Formation Light
Formation Light
Landing Light
63
THUNDER
JF-17
Anti-Collision Light
Navigation/Position Light
64
JF-17
PART 3 – COCKPIT & EQUIPMENT THUNDER Formation Light
65
Formation Light
THUNDER
JF-17
66
JF-17
Air-to-Air Refueling Light
67
THUNDER
BLCS (Boundary Layer

Control System) Holes
JF-17
DSI (Diverterless Supersonic Inlet)

Type of jet engine air intake to control air
flow into their engines. It consists of a
"bump" and a forward-swept inlet cowl,
which work together to divert boundary
layer airflow away from the aircraft's engine.
This eliminates the need for a splitter plate,
while compressing the air to slow it down
from supersonic to subsonic speeds. The DSI
can be used to replace conventional methods
of controlling supersonic and boundary-layer
airflow.
68
Static Port
THUNDER
JF-17
Pitot Probes
Angle of Attack Sensor
69
THUNDER COM1 Upper VHF Radio Antenna
GPS & Navigational Antennas

JF-17
IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) Antenna
COM1 Lower VHF

Radio Antenna 70
COM2 UHF Radio Antenna
Electrostatic Energy Dispensers

Also known as “static discharger”, they are high electrical
THUNDER
resistance devices with a lower corona voltage than the surrounding

aircraft structure. They control the corona discharge into the
JF-17
atmosphere. They are used on aircraft to allow the continuous

Flight Control &
satisfactory operation of onboard navigation and radio
Communication Antenna communication systems during precipitation (p-static) conditions.
Precipitation static is an electrical charge on an airplane caused by

flying through rain, snow, ice, or dust particles. When the aircraft
charge is great enough, it discharges into the surrounding air.
MAWS (Missile Approach Without static dischargers, the charge discharges in large batches
Warning System) through pointed aircraft extremities, such as antennas, wing tips,
vertical and horizontal stabilizers, and other protrusions.
Drag Chute Dome
Chaff & Flare

Dispenser Pod
71
THUNDER
Strake
JF-17
Chaff & Flare

Dispenser Pod
Chaff & Flare

Dispenser Pod Strake
72
THUNDER
JF-17
Night Vision Goggles (NVG) Controls:

• RSHIFT+H: On/Off
• RSHIFT+RALT+H: Gain Night Vision Goggles Down
• RSHIFT+RCTRL+H: Gain Night Vision Goggles Up 73
JF-17
74
DIGITAL MAP OPTIONS
In the real aircraft, digital map databases vary from operator to
operator. In the “Special” Options tab, you can select a number of
THUNDER
different options on the aircraft.

JF-17
As an example, you can choose whether to use Raster Charts or

Altitude Charts. Raster charts are what is typically used in the A-10C
Warthog or the F/A-18C Hornet. Altitude charts are more similar to
what you have in the Ka-50 Black Shark. Digital Map Option
PART 4 – KITS & OPTIONS
Raster Chart Option Altitude Chart Option 75

VOICE WARNING SYSTEM
A custom voice set can be selected for various warnings.
THUNDER
JF-17
Voice Option
76
CONTROL SLEW RATES
Slew rates and deadzones can be set for various controls.
THUNDER
JF-17
Control Deadzone
and Slew Rates
77
JF-17
PART 5 – START-UP PROCEDURE THUNDER
78
AIRCRAFT SETUP
1. Contact ground crew and select your desired loadout by pressing « \ »,
then pressing F8 (Ground Crew), and F1 (Rearm & Refuel).
THUNDER
JF-17
PART 5 – START-UP PROCEDURE
79
3a 4a
AIRCRAFT SETUP
2. If you want to install/remove the air refueling probe, contact ground crew
by pressing « \ », then pressing F8 (Ground Crew), and F8 (AAR Probe) and
THUNDER
either F1 or F2. This process can take about a minute or so.

3. Update Laser Codes as required if using laser-guided ordnance. Contact
JF-17
ground crew by pressing « \ », then pressing F8 (Ground Crew), and F7 3b 3c 4b

(Update Laser Code), and the pylon, respective codes, and finally F7
(Setting Complete).
4. Refill Utilities (Drag Chute, Oxygen Bottles, etc.). Contact ground crew by
pressing « \ », then pressing F8 (Ground Crew), and F9 (Refill Utilities).
2a
Note: You can request the ground crew to install or uninstall the air refueling
probe. However, the engine needs to be shut down prior to doing that.
Air-to-Air Refueling Air-to-Air Refueling

Probe Installed Probe Removed
2b
2c
80
AIRCRAFT SETUP
5. Remove Engine Inlet Covers and Ladder. Contact ground crew by pressing « \ »,
then pressing F8 (Ground Crew), and F10 (Remove Inlet Cover and Ladder).
THUNDER
Engine Inlet Cover

JF-17
5a
5b
Ladder
81
AIRCRAFT SETUP
6. For night operations, click on the Flashlight to use it.
7. You are now ready to begin the aircraft power-up sequence.
THUNDER
JF-17
Flashlight
82
BEFORE START-UP
8. Set Battery Switch – ON (FWD)
9. Set AC Generator Switch – ON (FWD)
THUNDER
10. Set DC Generator Switch – ON (FWD)

11. On AAP (Avionics Activation Panel), set COM1 and COM2 power supply switches ON.
JF-17
12. Provide power to MFCD, HUD and UFCP by setting WMMC1 (Weapon Mission
Management Computer) and WMMC2 switches ON.
13. On ACP (Audio Control Panel), set INT COM (Intercom) Switch – ON (FWD)
14. Set COM1, COM2, TCN/ILS and MSL (Missile) Volume Knobs – As required (Right = 10
Volume Up).
15. Set Warning Panel Brightness Knob – BRT
16. Set Oxygen Indicator Brightness Knob – BRT 9
8
15
11 12
11
12
13
16 14
14
14 83
14
BEFORE START-UP
17. Press MASTER CAUTION button to inhibit the “Warning” aural cue.
18. MFCDs (Multi-Purpose Colored Display) should already be powered ON by default.
THUNDER
19. Power up the HUD (Heads-Up Display) – Turn HUD CONT knob RIGHT and HUD BRT knob RIGHT.
20. Power up UFCP (Up-Front Control Panel) – Turn UFCP BRT knob RIGHT.
JF-17
17
18 18
19
20
18
84
BEFORE START-UP
21. Enter NAV Master Mode by setting MMS (Master Mode
Switch) to the MIDDLE position (control binding is
THUNDER
mapped to “1” by default).

22. In NAV Master Mode, Left MFCD (Multifunction
JF-17
Colored Display) will display the EFIS (Electronic Flight

Instrument) page, Center MFCD will display the Radar 22
22
page, and Right MFCD will display the HSD (Horizontal
Situation Display) page. Ensure MFCD Power knobs are
set to ON.
23. Set V/UHF Radio Mode selector to T/R (Transmit-
Receive) and turn up the Radio Volume knob.
22
23
21
T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch)

• UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
• MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation) 23
• DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
85
ENGINE START-UP
24. Before attempting an engine start, verify that Parking
Brake switch is set to PARK (FWD)
THUNDER
25. Set Fuel Pump Switch – START PUMP (FWD)

26. Set ENG CTRL (Engine Control) Switch – ON (FWD)
JF-17
27. Set Engine Start Mode selector – START (MIDDLE).

28. Click on the Throttle Idle/Stop Caging Lever to uncage
the lever from the STOP position.
29. Once Idle/Stop Caging Lever is released, throttle will
move from STOP position to IDLE position. Do not
move the throttle further forward or the throttle will
exit the IDLE range and the engine will not be able to 24
start.
30. Press and hold the GROUND START button for
approx. 4 seconds. This will initiate the Turbo Starter
cranking sequence, then the Engine start sequence
will follow after. When engine start sequence is

engaged, the START status light is visible.
25
28
26
29
20
27
START Status Light 86

ENGINE START-UP
31. On the EPI1 (Engine Performance Indicator) page (Lower Left MFCD), monitor engine N2 (High-Pressure Turbine Speed, % RPM) and verify it increases. HYD LOW, AC SYS, DC GEN and TRU
cautions will remain illuminated as long as N2 remains below 60 % RPM.
THUNDER
32. Engine lightoff should occur at approx. 10 % N2. Fuel valve will open and igniters will activate. T4 (Turbine Inlet Temperature) should start increasing.
33. Once start-up sequence is complete and engine reaches Idle state, engine parameters will stabilize to 70 % N2 and T4 < 500 deg C.
JF-17
34. The Engine-drive Hydraulic pump will automatically activate when N2 is approx. 60%, “HYD LOW” warning light should extinguish.
35. Set ECS (Environmental Control System) Switch to NORM. ECS air flow is required to cool down avionics; failing to do so within a reasonable timeframe will cause overheat issues, which
cause uncommanded MFCD failure. When ECS is ON, ECS and CABIN PRESS caution lights should extinguish.
33
31
34
35
31
87
POST-START-UP
36. Set SHARS (Strapped-down Heading Attitude Reference System)
switch – ON (FWD)
THUNDER
37. SHARS Alignment will take approx. 1 minute. Alignment status can be
monitored on the EFIS (Electronic Flight Instrument System) page
JF-17
(“SHARS ALIGN” blinking message). Take note that SHARS alignment is

independent of INS alignment.
38. When SHARS alignement is complete, pitch scale lines will appear on
the EFIS ADI (Attitude Director Indicator) and SHARS ALIGN message
will disappear.
39. On AAP (Avionics Activation Panel), set INS (Inertial Navigation
System) power supply switch ON.
40. The INS will start a BIT (Built-In Test) that lasts approx. 30 seconds.
Wait until the left MFCD displays the DST (Destination) page, and the 37 38
center MFCD displays the INS (Inertial Navigation System) page.
BACKUP indicates aircraft attitude data is obtained from the SHARS. NORM indicates
aircraft attitude data is obtained from the INS (Inertial Navigation System)
39
36
40a 40b
INS BIT In Progress INS BIT Complete
88
POST-START-UP
43
41. On UFCP (Up-Front Control Panel), press the DST (4)
41
button to enter the UFCP DESTINATION menu.
THUNDER
44a
42. Open your kneeboard (RSHIFT+K) to the NAV &
APPROACH page. Your current coordinates (Longitude,
JF-17
Latitude, Altitude and Heading) will be displayed

there. As an example:
• LATITUDE : 42°10’08.3’’ North (deg, min, sec)
• LONGITUDE: 042°28’11.1’’ East (deg, min, sec)
• ALTITUDE: 00153 (ft)
• HEADING: 229 deg
43. Verify DST Channel 00 is selected (DST Channel 00
stores coordinates used for INS alignment).
44. Enter Latitude:
a) Press arrow left of Latitude Data Field to select
Latitude coordinates
b) Enter Latitude coordinates on the UFCP

keypad: “4210083” for 42°10’08.3’’ North.
c) Press arrow left of Latitude Data Field to enter
Latitude coordinates
44d
d) Press arrow right of Latitude Data Field to
select North/South 44b 44c
42
89
POST-START-UP
46b
THUNDER

JF-17
45. Enter Longitude: 46a 46c

a) Press arrow left of Longitude Data Field to select Longitude coordinates
b) Enter Longitude coordinates on the UFCP keypad: “04228111” for
042°28’11.1’’ East.
c) Press arrow left of Longitude Data Field to enter Longitude coordinates
46d
d) Press arrow right of Latitude Data Field to select East/West
46. Enter Altitude:
a) Press arrow right of Altitude Data Field to select Altitude
b) Enter Altitude on the UFCP keypad: “00153” for 153 ft.
c) Press arrow right of Altitude Data Field to enter Altitude
d) Press arrow left of Altitude Data Field to select either + or – as required
45b
45d
45c
45a
90
POST-START-UP
47. Note: it is possible to request the ground crew to enter INS Alignment data for you.
To do so, contact ground crew by pressing « \ », then pressing F8 (Ground Crew), F6
THUNDER
(Update INS Align Data), then F1 (Get Parking Coordinates).

• Keep in mind that the coordinates entered by the ground crew include
JF-17
longitude, latitude, and altitude… but not THDG (True Heading). The THDG
parameter still needs to be entered manually.
91
POST-START-UP INS Alignment
Time Remaining
THUNDER

JF-17
48. Start INS Alignment by setting the INS Mode Selector

switch to FAST (Quick Alignment).
Note: You could also set the switch directly to NAV, which 50a 50a
will automatically start FAST alignment and then switch to
NAV once alignment is complete.
49. A green arrow will appear next to THDG since FAST INS
alignment requires True Heading to be entered during the
alignment phase. On Center MFCD INS page, press the OSB 49
(Option Select Button) next to “THDG” to enter MFCD EDIT
mode.
50. Press the OSBs next to the numbers indicated on the side
of the MFCD to enter your True Heading of 229.

51. Once True Heading is entered, INS FAST alignment will
restart automatically and take approx. 30-40 seconds to
complete.
51
50b
48
92
POST-START-UP INS Alignment INS Alignment
Time Remaining Complete
52. Once REMAIN TIME indication reaches 00:00:00 and FAST indication
blinks on the INS page, set INS Mode Selector switch to NAV. FAST
THUNDER
indication will change to NAV.

53. On AAP (Avionics Activation Panel), set NAV power supply switch ON.
JF-17
52a
52b
53
52b
52a
93
POST-START-UP
54. Connect Oxygen Tube to Oxygen Connector
49b
(a) and G-Suit Tube to G-Suit (b)
THUNDER
55. Open Oxygen Valve with mousewheel scroll.

Rotate Valve handle Counter-clockwise to 49a 55b
JF-17
open the valve. Check that the OXY BLINK

caution blinks to confirm that the oxygen
mask functions properly.
56. Arm Ejection Seat Handle. Verify that SEAT
advisory extinguishes.
57. Remove Ejection Seat Firing Handle safety
pin.
50b
50a
55a
54b
Safety Pin
54a Safety Pin Removed 94
POST-START-UP 59
58. On AAP (Avionics Activation Panel), activate remaining avionic systems required for the
mission:
THUNDER
a) The AAP will display what systems are ON and what systems are OFF
b) Press the CMBT (COMBAT) button to activate remaining avionic systems required
JF-17
for an air combat mission. This will automatically power on:

• RDR (Radar)
• SLNK (SD-10 Missile Link / Command Transmitter)
• OESP (Optical/Electronic Self Protection Countermeasures)
• RWR (Radar Warning Receiver)
• IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe)
• SAIU (Standard Armament Interface Unit)
c) If a targeting pod is equipped, press the CLDP (Convertible Laser Designator Pod)
button.
59. Set Emergency Hydraulic Switch – ON (FWD). This will arm the pump but not activate it
(unless a sudden loss of engine power occurs, which will automatically activate it).
58a
58c
58b
95
POST-START-UP 60b
60. Load DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) into the aircraft. The DTC is used to transfer
weapon data, navigation data, approach data and electronic warfare system data to
THUNDER
60e
the airplane. Marked points on the F10 map (e.g. RP1, RP2… RP6 Route Points for
802AKG anti-ship missile and PP1, PP2… PP4 Pre-Planned Points for Precision-Guided
JF-17
Munitions like the LS-6 and GB-6) will also be entered via the DTC.
a) Make sure DC Power is available (engine is started and DC GEN switch is ON)
and DTC card is unmounted.
b) Open canopy, then contact ground crew and request a DTC Data Update by
pressing « \ », then pressing F8 (Ground Crew), F5 (Update DTC Data), then
F1 (Update Data).
c) Once DTC is updated, click twice on the DTC slot to insert the cartridge.
d) Once DTC is inserted, left MFCD will automatically display to the DATA – DTC 60d
Sub-page with the « DTC LOCKED » message.
e) Press OSB (Option Select Button) next to « ALL » to select all data fields to be
updated (boxed when selected).
60b
60c Click a second
time to insert DTC 60c DTC Inserted
60b
60b
96
POST-START-UP
60. Load DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) into the aircraft. The DTC is used to transfer
weapon data, navigation data, approach data and electronic warfare system data to
THUNDER
the airplane. Marked points on the F10 map (e.g. RP1, RP2… RP4 Route Points for
JF-17
f) Press OSB (Option Select Button) next to « ENT » (Enter) to transfer data.
g) « DTC TRANS » message will indicate information transfer is in progress.
60g
h) « DTC LOCKED » message and unboxed data fields will indicate that the
information transfer is complete.
60h
60f
97
POST-START-UP
61. Check your configuration loadout on the SMS (Stores Management System) Lower Page of the Center MFCD.
62. Set AA/AG FCS Configuration Switch to AA if no external fuel tanks are mounted and air-to-air missiles are equipped.
THUNDER
Otherwise, set AA/AG switch to AG (Air-to-Ground).

63. Set AG1/AG2 FCS Configuration Switch to AG1 if air-to-ground weapons are mounted without external wing fuel tanks. If
JF-17
external wing fuel tanks are mounted, set AG1/AG2 switch to AG2.
• In our case, we have air-to-ground weapons with a central external fuel tank (no wing-mounted external tanks). Use
AG1.
• When in doubt, always make sure the AA/AG and AG1/AG2 switches are set in order to have the CONFIG caution
extinguished.
• Be careful: FCS G limit of AG2 is 5g and limit of AG1 is 6g. However, some munitions have a structural limit of 5.5g, and
the FCS config will still recommend AG1. Choose wisely. 64
Incorrect FCS Configuration
64. Check FCS (Flight Control System) Configuration. If the Warning Panel still displays a blinking “CONFIG” advisory, you are in the
wrong configuration.
65. Set EFCS (Emergency Flight Control System) – AUTO (FWD)
65
61
63
62
98
POST-START-UP
66. Click on Canopy Handle (FWD). Canopy Status arrow will then
point to the CLOSE mark.
THUNDER
67. Wait until canopy is completely closed.

68. Click on Canopy Handle to lock canopy. Canopy Status arrow 66a
JF-17
will then point to the CLOSED & SEALED mark.

69. Confirm that Canopy Seal Handle is at the SEAL (FWD) position. CLOSE Mark
70. Verify that no CANOPY advisory is displayed on the Warning
Panel.
66b
CLOSED &
SEALED Mark
68
69
99
POST-START-UP
71c
71. Set the Left MFCD (Multifunction Colored Display) page to the EFIS (Electronic Flight
Instrument) page. I recommend the Center MFCD to be set to the Radar page, and
THUNDER
the Right MFCD to be set to the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) page. These pages
will be memorized as the default pages for the Navigation Master Mode (NAV). As a
JF-17
71b
verification, you can cycle across master modes with the T1 MMS (Master Mode
Switch) on the throttle.
72. Set HNS (Hybrid Navigation System) mode to GPS and INS, which correlates the
inertial navigation system (INS) with the satellite global positioning system (GPS). This
is crucial when employing pre-planned precision-guided munitions.
a) Press HNS button
b) Toggle OSB next to INS until
INS+GPS is selected
c) “HNS” should be illuminated
d) Press RTN button on UFCP 72a
72b
71a
71d
72c
72

• MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation) 100
POST-START-UP
73. Turn on the clock.
74. Adjust Barometric Setting Knob as
THUNDER
required. Barometric Altitude displayed

on the HUD and EFIS should match the 73
JF-17
airport elevation we entered during

the INS alignment.
Airport Elevation
Aircraft Altitude during INS Alignment

74
Altitude (ft) Altitude (ft)
Barometric Pressure Setting (in Hg)

74
Barometric Pressure Setting Control Knob
101
POST-START-UP (DATALINK)
75. On the UFCP, press RTN to go to the main menu.
76. Press on the Arrow Select button next to COM2 to select COM2.
THUNDER
77. Press on the Arrow Select button next to COM2 a second time to edit COM2 channel. 75
76
78. Enter Channel 199, then press Arrow Select button next to COM2. This channel is reserved exclusively for Datalink and must
JF-17
remain at this channel at all times.

79. Press on the Arrow Select button next to SLAV to toggle Datalink Mode to MASTER (HOST) if no Master is available on the
Network (will most likely be the case in multiplayer servers).
80. Press on the Arrow Select button next to NE- to turn on the network. NET setting will change from NE- to NES (ON).
81. Click on the CLNK OSB to select the CLINK (Datalink) page. You will see your ID, mode, Datalink setting, Channel ID and Group.
82. Your ID is already set and cannot be changed. This will be how you are displayed on other people on the network.
83. Set Datalink Network Channel ID required by your coalition (should be available in the mission briefing).
77
82: Your own ID (02)

83: Channel ID
78b
78a
80 79
102
81
86
POST-START-UP (IFF)
84. Verify IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) system is powered on the AAP (Avionics
THUNDER
Activation Panel).
85. Press “IFF” on the UFCP.
86. INT indicates that we are in the IFF Interrogation Menu (INT).
JF-17
87. Press Arrow button next to the desired Interrogation Mode. This will
determine what interrogation signal we send to the transponders of other 87
85
aircraft. In our case, we will choose Mode 6.
88. A « + » next to « M6 » will indicate Mode 6 is selected.
89. * An Interrogation Code is required when scanning another JF-17 type.
Press the Arrow button next to CODE. 84
90. * Select code for desired mode. We will choose A for Mode 6. NOTE:
91. * Press BACK to return to Interrogation menu.
Steps preceded by * are not mandatory if
92. Press on the Arrow button next to the dot to select the IFF Transponder
flying in Single Player or flying against JF-17s
Menu (TRS).
with the “Simplified IFF” setting.
93. Press Arrow button next to the desired Transponder Mode. This will
93
determine what response signal we send when our own aircraft is
interrogated. In our case, we will choose Mode 6. Interrogation Code Transponder Code
94. * A « + » next to « M6 » will indicate Mode 6 is selected. A Transponder
Code is required when being interrogated by other aircraft that are not of
(Who are you?) (Who am I?)
the JF-17 type. Press the Arrow button next to CODE. Mode 6 Mode 6
95. * Select code for desired mode. We will choose A for Mode 6.
96. * Select IP+ option if desired. It will swap A and B encryption keys
interleavely to allow other Mode 6 interrogators with A key to recognize
A A 94
you if you have your B key on.
92
95
88 90 96
91
89
103
POST-START-UP
97. Set Air Temperature Control Selector to desired cockpit
THUNDER
temperature. 20-25 deg C is a good temperature.

98. If cockpit is fogged, press the Defog button to initiate defogging
sequence. Press button a second time when fog has been cleared
JF-17
from the canopy, or wait until the defogging sequence finishes

automatically after a few minutes.
98
97
104
TAXI
1. Remove Wheel Chocks. Contact ground crew by
pressing « \ », then pressing F8 (Ground Crew), F4
THUNDER
(Wheel Chocks) and F2 (Remove).

JF-17
1a
PART 6 – TAXI & TAKEOFF
1b
1c
105
3
TAXI
2. Parking Brake Switch – DISENGAGED (NORM/AFT) 2
3. Set Formation, Anti-Collision & Position Lights – As Required. Take note that
THUNDER
Position Lights should be set to FLASH when parked or taxiing and STEADY
after takeoff.
JF-17
4. Turn on Taxi Light (switch FWD)

5. Press the S5 (Missile Step Button / Nosewheel Steering) to engage nosewheel
steering for taxiing; this will allow you to turn using rudder pedals. The “NWS”
Status light indicates nosewheel steering is active. The JF17’s turning radius is
8 meters.
4

(Nosewheel Steering) Control Button
106
TAKEOFF
3
1. TEF (Trailing Edge Flaps) are not required for
takeoff unless aircraft is in a very heavy
THUNDER
4
configuration.
2. Once lined up with the runway, press the S5
JF-17
(Missile Step Button / Nosewheel Steering) to

disengage nosewheel steering. Confirm that the
“NWS” Status light is extinguished.
3. Turn on the A/B (Afterburner) switch (FWD).
4. Check the Status panel and confirm that correct
Flight Control System mode is selected.
5. Turn OFF taxi light.

107
TAKEOFF
6. Set takeoff trim
a) Use S6 Hat Switch on the stick UP/DOWN to trim the elevator/pitch up
THUNDER
or down until the PITCH TRIM status light is visible. This means that the
pitch trim is set to Neutral.
JF-17
b) Use S6 Hat Switch on the stick LEFT/RIGHT to trim the aileron/roll axis
left or right until the ROLL TRIM status light is visible. This means that
the roll trim is set to Neutral.
c) Use Yaw Trim switch LEFT/RIGHT to trim the rudder axis left or right
until the YAW TRIM status light is visible. This means that the rudder
trim is set to Neutral.
6a
6b
Trim Not Set
6c
108
Trim Set
TAKEOFF
7. Hold brakes and throttle up to 80 % RPM. Verify there are no out lights.
8. Release brakes and increase power with the throttle. For light loadouts, set takeoff power to 90 % RPM. For heavy loadouts, set throttle fully forward to engage afterburner.
THUNDER
JF-17
109
TAKEOFF
9. An automatic take-off trim function will activate when your wheel speed
exceeds 41 kts. The system will start deflecting the horizontal stabilizer 8
THUNDER
degrees when airspeed reaches 108 kts.

10. At 120 kts, gently pull the control stick to establish takeoff attitude (10 deg of
JF-17
pitch angle).
11. Rotate at approx. 140 kts.
12. Raise landing gear when 30 ft above the ground. Make sure the landing gear
is retracted below 300 kts or the gear will jam in position.
12
12
110
JF-17
PART 6 – TAXI & TAKEOFF THUNDER
TAKEOFF
111
LANDING
1. Slow down using throttle and speed brakes
2. Deploy flaps (TEF, Trailing Edge Flaps) and landing gear when below 300 kts
THUNDER
3. Turn on LANDING Light (AFT)

JF-17
2
PART 7 – LANDING
3 2
T3: Speed Brake Switch 1
112
LANDING
3. Adjust power and trim to maintain an “On Speed” AoA (Angle of Attack) of about 10 degrees. The Flight Path Marker should remain within the “E” bracket on the HUD.
4. Use Radar Altitude as a reference.
THUNDER
JF-17
Angle of Attack (AoA) in degrees

Airspeed (kts)
Barometric Altitude (ft)
Radar Altitude (ft)

PART 7 – LANDING
E Bracket
Flight Path Marker
113
LANDING
5. Flare at 3 ft above ground level. The two main wheels should touch the ground first.
6. During touchdown, maintain your Angle of Attack (10 deg) to perform an aerobraking landing and set throttle to IDLE. This manoeuver will bleed speed in the process (your wings will act
THUNDER
as a huge airbrake).
JF-17
PART 7 – LANDING
114
8c
LANDING
7. As the aircraft slows down, the nose gear
will touch the ground by itself. Gently apply
THUNDER
brakes when aircraft airspeed is below 145

kts. 9
JF-17
8. When aircraft slows down to 135 kts,

deploy drag chute by setting the D/CH 8a
switch to DEPLOY (UP).
9. When airspeed is below 20 kts, jettison
drag chute by setting the D/CH switch to
JETT (DOWN). For subsequent flights, the
drag chute will have to be installed again by
the ground crew once re-arming and re- 8b
fueling is performed.
PART 7 – LANDING
115
JF-17
PART 7 – LANDING THUNDER
LANDING
116
JF-17
PART 8 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT THUNDER
117
KLIMOV RD-93 ENGINE
The JF-17 is powered by the Klimov RD-93, which is a variant derived from the RD-33 turbofan engine used for the MiG-29. The main difference between the RD-93 and the RD-33 is that the gearbox was
THUNDER
repositioned along the bottom of the engine casing. Klimov advertised the increased thrust of the engine to be 49.4 kN (11105 lbf) for Military Power (Dry Thrust) and 85.3 kN (19180 lbf) with Afterburner
(Wet Thrust). This thrust increase comes at the expense of a decrease in service life from 4000 hours on the RD-33 to 2200 hours on the RD-93.
JF-17
The RD-33 was developed in OKB-117 led by

S. P. Izotov (now OAO Klimov) from 1968,
with production starting in 1981. Previous
generations of Russian supersonic fighters
PART 8 – ENGINE & FUEL MANAGEMENT
such as the MiG-21 and MiG-27 used

turbojets, but western fighters such as the F-
111 and F-4K introduced the use of
afterburning turbofans in the 1960s which
were more efficient. The RD-33 was the first
afterburning turbofan engine produced by
the Klimov company of Russia in the 8,000 to
9,000 kilograms-force (78,000 to 88,000 N;
18,000 to 20,000 lbf) thrust class. It features
a modular twin-shaft design with individual
parts that can be replaced separately.
The first few series of the basic RD-33 version

had some issue with the oil system, where a
leakage caused a series of problems for the
test pilots, because the oil leakage generated
toxic particles in the air conditioning system.
After the production line was going, these
kinds of teething problems were solved. The
only disadvantage was a low service life, and
heavy smoke, which was fixed only in the
later models.
118
ENGINE PARAMETERS
Engine parameters are listed on the EPI1 page (primary parameters) and on the DATA – ENG sub-page (secondary parameters).
THUNDER
N2 (High-Pressure Turbine Speed) (% RPM) T4 (Exhaust Gas Temperature) (deg C)

JF-17
N2 (High-Pressure Turbine Speed) (% RPM)
PT1 (Afterburner Injector

Fuel Pressure) (kgf/cm2)
N1 (Fan/Low-Pressure
Compressor Speed) (% RPM)
EPI1 (Engine Performance Indicator) Page

T4 (Exhaust Gas Temperature) (deg C)
PM (Engine Oil Pressure)

(kgf/cm2)
PT (Fuel Filter Differential

Pressure) (kgf/cm2)
VE (Engine Vibration
Speed) (mm/s)
DATA – ENG Page
119
ENGINE CONTROL MODES
There are three main engine modes, which are controlled
THUNDER
by the Engine Mode switch:
• CMBT (Combat): Increases maximum allowable power

JF-17
to 100 % N2 but also increases engine wear.
• C+T (Normal): Maximum allowable power is limited to

99.2 % N2, which is a happy medium between CMBT Engine Mode: CMBT
and TRG.
• TRG (Training): Reduces maximum allowable power to

98.6 % N2 , which reduces engine wear and help
prolong engine life.
• SEC (Secondary Engine Control): This hybrid mechanical

backup mode is selected in the case of failure of the
engine-mounted digital computer that controls
scheduling of engine fuel flow. This mode will inhibit
every other mode (including afterburner operation) and
limit N2 to 97 % RPM.
Engine Mode: C+T
Engine Mode: SEC Engine Mode: TRG 120

AFTERBURNER & ANTI-SURGE
The afterburner requires the A/B switch to be ON before throttling past the MIL (Military) Power gate on the throttle quadrant. Once engaged, the AB Status Light illuminates. Do keep in mind that the fuel
THUNDER
flow consumption will increase dramatically; keep an eye on those fuel gauges.
JF-17
Very important: if airspeed is greater than Mach 1.35 and afterburner is engaged, an interlock will physically block the throttle from going from the afterburner zone to the IDLE-MIL zone. In this situation,
you can bypass the interlock by pushing down the Throttle Emergency Button and throttling down. Throttling below AB at fast speeds may cause an engine surge or an engine flameout.
The Anti-Surge switch should be ON at all times. Engine surge is the increase in RPM of a stalled compressor, which results in the complete disruption of the airflow through the compressor.
The severity of the phenomenon ranges from a momentary power drop barely registered by the engine instruments to a complete loss of compression in case of a surge, requiring adjustments in the fuel
flow to recover normal operation. Interruption of airflow in jets can be caused by abrupt maneuvering, ingestion of foreign matter, or excessive application of throttle. Much has been done to eliminate
this issue in modern jets, but the nature of the design still makes it possible. If air flow is interrupted to the compressor, the jet can literally backfire, creating a loud "bang". A large yellow flame may also be
seen coming from the back of the jet as the fuel/air mixture is now excessively rich due to insufficient air. If the engine is not damaged, it can be re-started the same way we unstall a wing, by re-
establishing proper airflow angle of attack. This is done by lowering pressure BEHIND the compressor by reducing the throttle setting. Provided the engine is not damaged, throttle can be carefully
restored.
In the same manner, the Anti-Surge system will automatically reduce engine power if a compressor stall is detected.
AB (Afterburner) Status Light
A/B (Afterburner) Switch
Anti-Surge Switch Throttle Emergency Button 121

ENGINE FLAMEOUT CONSIDERATIONS
If for some reason the engine flames out, you need to take into consideration the following things:
THUNDER
• The JF-17 does not have an APU (Auxiliary Power Unit) or EPU (Emergency Power Unit) to provide power; most of your avionics
JF-17
and navigation systems will run on the battery alone. You will have roughly 10 minutes of battery power available before the
battery is completely drained.
• Once a loss of RPM is detected, the emergency hydraulic pump will kick in (provided it is armed with the EMG HYD switch) and
provide you enough hydraulic pressure from an accumulator for the flight control surfaces to be usable.
• The ECS (Environment Control System) in NORM mode runs on engine bleed air. In case of an engine flameout, this bleed air
pressure will decrease to a point where it is not sufficient to supply your air systems like air conditioning (which is a necessity
when the outside air temperature is -50 deg C). You will need to use ram air instead by setting the ECS switch to RAM.
• In this particular case, failing to use ram air at high altitudes may cause your pilot to suffer from hypothermia or suffocation.
Your first action during an engine flameout at high altitude should be to descend as soon as possible.
122
ENGINE RELIGHT PROCEDURE
To perform an engine relight while in flight:
THUNDER
1. Throttle back to IDLE

JF-17
2. Immediately nose down to gain enough airspeed for the engine’s compressor blades to generate enough RPM due to windmilling (air
flow drives compressor blades). If the engine has flameout has occurred, the emergency hydraulic pump will kick in and provide you
enough hydraulic pressure for the flight control surfaces to be usable.
3. Set aircraft flight parameters within engine relight envelope:
• If altitude is below 26200 ft, maintain an airspeed greater than 215 kts.
• If altitude is between 26200 ft and 39370 ft (max altitude for relight), maintain an airspeed greater than 240 kts
4. When engine N2 RPM is windmilling at more than 12 %, verify that Fuel Pump Switch is set to START PUMP (FWD) and ENG CTRL
(Engine Control) Switch is set to ON (FWD).
5. Set Engine Air Start cover guard UP, then set Engine Air Start switch ON (FWD). START status light indicates engine start is in progress.
6. Confirm N2 increase (confirms engine starter is active) and wait for T4 to increase (engine lightoff).
7. Once engine start is successful and engine has resumed normal operation, set Engine Air Start switch OFF (AFT)
5c
4
5a
4
5b
123
FUEL SYSTEM
The JF-17 is equipped with 3 internal fuselage tanks, 2 internal wing tanks. External fuel tanks can DATA- FUEL Sub-Page
THUNDER
be equipped under the fuselage (800 L) and under the wings (800 L or 1100 L). Total fuel quantity
is displayed on the Heads-Up Display, while the Total Quantity and T2 Fuselage Feed Tank
JF-17
Quantities are indicated on the EPI1 page.
To have a more thorough breakdown of fuel quantities for individual tanks, you can consult the
DATA – FUEL sub-page.
Note: Keep in mind that there can be an engine flameout if the afterburner is engaged for over 5
seconds during a negative G condition (or for over 12 seconds in zero G condition).
Total Fuel Quantity Indicator (lbs)
EPI1 (Engine Performance Indicator) Page

124
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL TANK OVERVIEW
THUNDER
• TOTAL (includes external tanks): 10997 lbs

JF-17
• LEFT WING TANK: 535 lbs

• RIGHT WING TANK: 535 lbs
• T1 FRONT FUSELAGE TANK:1091 lbs
• T2/FEED CENTER FUSELAGE TANK: 1896 lbs
• T3 AFT FUSELAGE TANK: 1069 lbs
T3 Aft Fuselage Tank

• EXTERNAL WING LEFT TANK (1100 L): 2180 lbs
• EXTERNAL FUSELAGE CENTER TANK (800 L): 1510 lbs T2 Feed/Center Fuselage Tank
• EXTERNAL WING RIGHT TANK (1100 L): 2180 lbs
Wing Tank T1 Front Fuselage Tank
Wing Tank
External Wing Tank (1100 L)

125
FUEL SYSTEM
External tanks are automatically consumed first. To jettison these tanks, go in the SMS page, select JET (Jettison) sub-
THUNDER
menu on the lower section of the MFCD, select the external tanks with their respective OSBs, set Master Arm ON and
press the Weapon Release button to jettison the tanks.
JF-17
See the Weapons & Armament section for more details.

126
FUEL SYSTEM
Your “BINGO FUEL” can be set by pressing “FUL” on the UFCP. Bingo fuel is the fuel quantity required to make it back to base.
THUNDER
When fuel state falls below BINGO fuel limit, a FUEL caution will appear in the HUD and the UFCP FUL menu will automatically appear.
JF-17
BINGO FUEL Caution
FUL UFCP Menu Button
127
AERODYNAMICS & AIRCRAFT LIMITS
AIRSPEED LIMITS
THUNDER
Maximum indicated airspeed at low altitude is 702 kts or Mach 1.6 at high altitude. This speed
JF-17
may be exceeded, but the aircraft will likely suffer from severe aeroelastic problems (i.e.
flutter, which is a dynamic instability of an elastic structure in a fluid flow) and aerodynamic
overheating.
AOA (ANGLE OF ATTACK) LIMITS
During takeoff and landing, the angle of attack must not exceed 12 deg. If the aircraft carries a
heavv payload (i.e. a GBU-12 or 800 L fuel tank on the center pylon), it is recommended to
PART 9 – FLIGHT & AERODYNAMICS
keep the AoA at 10 deg or below. When in AA (Air-to-Air) FCS configuration, the maximum
allowable angle of attack is 27 deg.
G LIMITS
• Structural Limits for the aircraft are +8 G / - 3 G.

• When in AA (Air-to-Air) FCS configuration, maximum G loading is 8 G. When over Mach 0.85
(transonic speeds), maximum allowable G loading is 6.5 G.
• When in AG (Air-to-Ground) FCS configuration, maximum G loading is 6 G, but this limit only
protects your aircraft. Your payloads may be damaged at lower Gs (e.g. 5.5 G for C-701 TV
missiles).
• There can be an engine flameout if the afterburner is engaged for over 5 seconds during a
negative G condition (or for over 12 seconds in zero G condition).
WEIGHT LIMITS
Maximum Takeoff Weight: 29750 lbs (12383 kg)
FLIGHT ENVELOPE
Service Ceiling: 55500 ft
128
HOTAS
STICK CONTROLS
THUNDER
S3 S6
S5
JF-17
S8
S4
S2
S1 S7
• S1: Sensor Selection (SS) Switch

• S2: Sensor Control (SC) Switch
• S3: Weapon Launch/Release Button
• S4: Gun Trigger
• S5: Missile Step Button / Nosewheel Steering
PART 10 – HOTAS
Control Button
• S6: Trim Hat Switch
• S7: Autopilot Disengage Button
• S8: Missile Type Selection Button
129
HOTAS
THROTTLE CONTROLS
THUNDER
JF-17
T1
T4
T2
T5 T3 T6
• T1: Master Mode Switch

• T2: Countermeasure Switch: Chaff Flare
Dispense/Cage-Uncage Switch
PART 10 – HOTAS
• T3: Speed Brake Switch

• T4: Radio PTT/IFF (Push-to-Talk/Identify-Friend-
or-Foe) Interrogation Button
• T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
• T6: Antenna Elevation Switch
130
JF-17
PART 11 – RADAR & SENSORS THUNDER
131
SECTION STRUCTURE
• 1 - Sensors • 3 - WMD-7 Targeting Pod
THUNDER
• 1.1 – Introduction to Sensors • 3.1 – Introduction

• 1.2 – Sensors Display Selection • 3.2 – Displays
• •
JF-17
1.3 – My Sensors Control Setup 3.3 – Controls

• 3.4 – Snowplow Mode
• 2 - KJL-7 Radar • 3.5 – Slave Mode
• 2.1 – Air-to-Air Modes • 3.6 – Start-Up & Lasing Procedure
• 2.1.1 – Radar Display & Performance • 3.7 – Laser Spot Search Mode
• 2.1.2 – Main Modes Overview • 3.8 – Waypoint/Markpoint Slaving
• 2.1.3 – RWS Mode • 3.9 – Air-to-Air Operation
• 2.1.4 – TWS Mode • 3.9.1 – Operation Modes
• 2.1.5 – VS Mode • 3.9.2 – Point Track (Slaved from Radar)
• 2.1.6 – SAM (ASM/NAM) Mode
• 2.1.7 – ACM Modes • 4 - CM-802AKG TV-Guided Missile
• 2.1.7.1 – VT Mode • 4.1 – Displays
• 2.1.7.2 – BS Mode • 4.2 – Controls
• 2.1.7.3 – HA Mode
PART 11 – RADAR & SENSORS
• 2.1.8 – STT Mode (Radar Lock) • 5 - C-701 TV-Guided Missile

• 2.1.9 – DTT Mode (Radar Lock) • 5.1 – Displays
• 2.2 – Air-to-Ground Modes • 5.2 – Controls
• 2.2.1 – Air-to-Ground Operating Modes
• 2.2.2 – MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode
• 2.2.3 – Expanded Modes
• 6 - Integrated Sensors Operation
• 2.2.3.1 – EXP Sub-Mode
• 2.2.3.2 – DBS1 Sub-Mode
• 2.2.3.3 – DBS2 Sub-Mode
• 2.2.4 – Target Designation: FTT (Fixed Target Track) Mode
• 2.2.5 – Target Designation: GMTI (Ground Moving Target Indicator) Mode
• 2.2.6 – WA (Weather Awareness) Mode
• 2.2.7 – TA (Terrain Avoidance) Mode
• 2.2.8 – BCN (Beacon) Mode
• 2.3 – Air-to-Sea Modes
• 2.3.1 – SEA1 Mode
• 2.3.2 – SEA2 Mode
• 2.3.3 – SSTT/SMTT (Sea Single/Moving Target Track) Mode
• 2.4 – Radar Lingo and Terminology
132
1.1 – INTRODUCTION TO SENSORS
The JF-17 is by definition one of the most versatile aircraft when it comes to armament and sensors. Here is an overview of how the Thunder can “see” the outside world.
THUNDER
• KJL-7 Radar: pulse-Doppler, look-down/shoot-down radar with both BVR (Beyond Visual Range) and close in ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering) modes of operation for air-to-air combat. Air-to-
JF-17
Ground and Air-to-Sea modes are also implemented, which makes it a very powerful tool at your disposal.
• Air-to-Air Modes currently implemented are RWS (Range While Search), TWS (Track While Scan), VS (Velocity Search), SAM (Situational Awareness Mode), STT (Single Target Track), DTT
(Dual Target Track) and ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering).
• Air-to-Ground Modes include MAP (Ground Mapping) and GMTI (Ground Moving Target Indicator).
• Air-to-Sea Modes include SEA1 (searches both moving and non-moving targets) and SEA2 (searches moving targets only).
• WMD-7 Targeting Pod: Targeting system developed to

provide precision strike capability. Target designation is
achieved by using a laser designator/range finder. It is also
capable of displaying a FLIR (Forward-Looking Infrared)
thermal imagery.
• CM-802AKG & C-701 TV-Guided Missile Seeker Head

feed: These air-to-ground missiles have seeker heads that

have video capability and that can be used as
supplemental sensors.
• Datalink Pod: This pod is used to allow TV-Guided missiles

like the CM-802AKG to be controlled remotely (Man-In-
The-Loop).
KJL-7 Radar
CM-802AKG TV-Guided Missile
Datalink Pod
WMD-7 Targeting Pod
133
This section will introduce you to various sensors. You will get the « what », but the « how » will be demonstrated
THUNDER
later in the Weapons section since the use and application of sensors will make more sense to you once you start
using them for a specific purpose. Just keep in mind that your sensors can be monitored from the HUD (Heads-Up AAP (Avionics
JF-17
Display) and various displays, while they can be operated from the HOTAS stick and throttle. Activation Panel)
S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch

• MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation)
DISPLAYS
S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch
T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch
134
Targeting Pod (POD) Page
THUNDER
JF-17
Radar (RDR) Page

This page will display either the air-to-air
radar page or the air-to-ground/air-to-sea
radar base on the Master Mode selected by
the MMS (Master Mode Switch)
135
1.2 – SENSORS DISPLAY SELECTION
SMS Page HSD Page
The MMS (Master Mode Switch) is used to set up the MFCDs in preset configurations.
THUNDER
• In A/G (Air-to-Ground) mode the switch sets your Air-to-Ground Radar, SMS (Stores
Management System) and HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) pages.
• In INTC (Air-to-Air Intercept) Mode, the Air-to-Air Radar, SMS and HSD pages are selected.
JF-17
• In NAV (Navigation) Mode, the Air-to-Air Radar, EFIS and HSD pages are selected.
Air-to-Ground Radar Page

• UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) A/G (Air-to-Ground)
• MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation) Master Mode
EFIS Page HSD Page

Selected Master Mode
SMS Page HSD Page
Air-to-Air Radar Page

Air-to-Air Radar Page
INTC (Air-to-Air Intercept) NAV (Navigation)

136
Master Mode
Master Mode
1.2 – SENSORS DISPLAY SELECTION
For those familiar with the A-10C, F/A-18, and F-16, the S1 Sensor Selection Switch is similar to setting a SOI
THUNDER
(Sensor of Interest).
• S1 (Sensor Selection) Switch functions:
• UP/FWD selects air-to-air radar ACM (Air Combat Manoeuvering) modes, then cycles gun reticles.
JF-17
• DOWN/AFT cycles SS (Sensor Selection) Asterisk between HUD and Center MFCD in NAV and AG Selected Master Mode
Master Modes. It selects Center MFCD when in INTC Master Mode.
• RIGHT/LEFT selects either the right or left MFCD. HUD Selected Asterisk
• Selecting a particular display allows you to us the TDC cursor. You will know what sensor is selected with a
Sensor Selection Diamond on either the selected MFCD or the HUD.


S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch MFCD Selected Asterisk 137
1.3 – MY SENSORS CONTROL SETUP
S2 (Sensor Control) UP
THUNDER

S2 (Sensor Control) LEFT
JF-17
Weapon Release T5 (TDC) Press (ENTER)

Gun Trigger: Second
Detent
S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. FWD

S1S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. RIGHT
S1S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. AFT
S1S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. LEFT
COMM Switch: COMM 1

TDC SLEW VERTICAL
COMM Switch: COMM 2 TDC SLEW HORIZONTAL
TDC SLEW VERTICAL
TDC SLEW HORIZONTAL
SPEED BRAKE RETRACT

Autopilot / Nosewheel
Steering Disengage (Paddle) SPEED BRAKE EXTEND T1 BACK (MMS AG)
T1 CENTER (MMS NAV)
T1 FWD (MMS INTC)
ATC Engage/Disengage
Throttle Finger Lift (BOTH)
T6 Axis: Antenna Elevation

138
KJL-7 RADAR
2.1.1 – Air-to-Air Radar Display & Performance
THUNDER
The air-to-air radar uses a B-Scope representation, which is a top- B-Scope (Top-Down)
down view of what’s in front of you.
Forward
Representation
JF-17
• You can slew your radar and lock a target using the TDC, or Target
Designator Controller. Contact
• Radar Data can be shown on the RDR page and on the HUD
(Heads-Up Display).
• The S1 Sensor Selection Switch is used to set up which display is

TDC
selected (left MFCD, right MFCD, center MFCD or HUD) or which
radar mode you will be using.

Left/Right (Azimuth)
T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch
S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch Radar Power 139
KJL-7 RADAR
2.1.1 – Air-to-Air Radar Display & Performance Range: 55 nm
Total Azimuth: 120 deg
THUNDER
The JF-17’s radar has a range of 55 nautical miles, a horizontal arc of 120 degrees
and a variable vertical arc that is customizable. You can control the radar scan
JF-17
pattern (bars), which will give you a narrower or wider scanning area.
The numbers next to the TDC correspond to the altitudes (in thousands of feet) of
the top and bottom of the radar beam at the distance of the target designator. As
you move the target designator closer and further you will see the numbers
change. The practical application is that the radar will not detect targets above or
below these altitudes which is why you need to slew the radar antenna up and
down to do a complete search.
Note: Ranges are not to scale

TDC (Throttle Designator Controller) Acquisition Cursor

Upper number: Upper altitude covered by radar (11000 ft)
Lower number: Lower altitude covered by radar (9000 ft)
Range: 55 nm
140
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
JF-17
Range: Full Scale (40 nm)
Radar Scan Envelope Lines Range Scale Reference: 40 nm

(can be set to 10/20/40/80 nm)
Range: 3/4 Scale (30 nm)

Radar Azimuth (Coverage for half the total azimuth)

(can be set to 10/25/30/60 deg)
Range: 0 ft
Radar Contact
Based on Azimuth and Range Scale, we can deduce that
the contact is 15 nm in front of us, 10 degrees to our right. 141
The “9” number indicates the aircraft is at 9000 ft.
KJL-7 RADAR
IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe)
THUNDER
Status
JF-17
Radar Standby/ON Selector Silent (SIL) Mode: Radar ceases operation

and placed in STANDBY mode.
(STBY Crossed Out = Radar ON)
Radar Mode Selected
CNTL: Radar Control Menu

Flight Path Marker
Increase Range Scale

Horizon Line
Range Scale Reference: 40 nm
(can be set to 10/20/40/80 nm)
Antenna Elevation Caret
Decrease Range Scale
Radar Azimuth (Coverage for half the total azimuth) Radar Antenna Azimuth Limits
(can be set to 10/25/30/60 deg) Waypoint 1 (shown: 30 deg)
Radar Altitude Stabilization Mode TDC (Target Designator Controller) Acquisition Cursor
Upper number: Upper altitude covered by radar (11000 ft)
Lower number: Lower altitude covered by radar (9000 ft)
Elevation Bar Scan
Cycles between 1, 2, 3, 4 bars of faster scanning. Radar PRF (Pulse Repetition
Frequency) Selection
PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) HI/MED/AUTO
Medium/High
Ownship altitude (ft)
Ownship Airspeed (Kts) Ownship Heading B-Sweep (T symbol shows
instantaneous azimuth
position of radar antenna)
142
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
Take note that if the aircraft is connected to a datalink network, the radar scan cone and SD-10 missile range will be visible on the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display). We will talk about this further in the
Datalink section.
JF-17
HSD (Horizontal Situation Indicator) EVP: When boxed, displays radar scan envelope cone
Radar Scan Envelope Cone (EVP)
SD-10 Missile Maximum Range Cone

143
KJL-7 RADAR
2.1.2 – Air-to-Air Radar Main Modes Overview
THUNDER
The radar has the following main modes: BVR (Beyond Visual Range, used for long-distance engagements), and ACM (Air Combat Maneuvering, used for close air engagements).
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
JF-17
BVR Search sub-modes include:
• RWS (Range While Search): RWS radar mode allows for detection of contacts in a large volume. It is the default search mode for air-to-air or when an air-to-air missile is placed in priority. RWS
mode provides all-aspect (nose-on, tail-on) and all altitude (look-up, look-down) target detection. The display shows range as the vertical axis and azimuth angle on the horizontal. While in RWS
mode, the radar can maintain up to 10 trackfiles.
• TWS (Track While Scan): TWS maintains an actual track on several aircraft while still searching for others. The radar allocates part of its power to tracking the target or targets while part of its
power is allocated to scanning, unlike the straight tracking mode, when the radar directs all its power to tracking the acquired targets. In the TWS mode the radar has a possibility to acquire
additional targets as well as providing an overall view of the airspace and helping maintain better situational awareness. Since the radar is sharing it's computing time between targets, the
accuracy is less precise than for a single target track (STT) mode of operation.
• VS (Velocity Search): A high PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency) Pulse Doppler waveform is used for long range detection primarily against nose aspect targets, giving velocity and azimuth
information, but no range information. Although velocity search can work against tail-on targets, the Doppler return is weaker, consequently the maximum detection range is also much less.
When the target is in the beam (flying perpendicular to the fighter), the closure (Doppler) is the same as ground return and target return is almost zero.
• SAM (Situational Awareness Mode): SAM mode is a hybrid mode between RWS and STT. When locking a target in RWS mode, the radar enters SAM mode. In SAM mode, radar will periodically
scan the locked target while scanning the whole area. In SAM mode, the controls are basically same as RWS.
Available Azimuth/Bar Elevation Settings

(per Radar Mode)
RWS Azimuth: 10, 30 or 60 deg (with any BAR)
Bars: 1, 2 or 4 bar (with any AZ)
TWS Setting 1: 25 deg with 3 Bars
Setting 2: 60 deg with 2 Bars
144
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
JF-17
STT (Single Target Track): STT mode is a traditional radar "lock" where the radar continuously scans a single target, resulting in a very high update rate; this makes it the primary method of providing
guidance to air-to-air weapons. STT maintains a trackfile and the radar is slaved to this trackfile; as such, manual antenna elevation control is inhibited and the B-sweep follows the trackfile. Only the
trackfile that is placed in STT is visible and all onboard trackfiles are dropped.
DTT (Dual Target Track): In this mode, radar can track an HPT (High Priority Target) and a SPT (Secondary Priority Target). HUD will only show HPT’s TD box. Using S2 (Sensor Control Switch) left will
switch between HPT and SPT.
145
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
JF-17
ACM sub-modes include:
• VT (Vertical Scan): Radar will scan in a 10°× 50° vertical area.
• BS (Boresight): Radar will scan in cone with a diameter of 4°.
• HA (Heads-Up Display Area): Radar will scan the whole HUD area.
146
KJL-7 RADAR • UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
2.1.3 – Air-to-Air Radar RWS Mode • MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation)
THUNDER
RWS (Range While Search) is a mode where the antenna follows the designated search pattern and informs you of
all the tracks discovered in one sweep. You can then select a specific track and lock it into STT mode.
JF-17
RWS is selected in the following manner: MFCD Selected Asterisk

1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) UP to INTC (Intercept). Center MFCD will automatically be set as the
Sensor of Interest (SOI), as shown by the asterisk.
2. Set radar mode from STANDBY to ON by pressing the Radar Standby/ON Selector.
3. Press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select Button) until radar mode is cycled to RWS.
In RWS mode, the S2 Sensor Control Switch has the following functions: T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch
• FWD: Increases Display Distance
• AFT: Decreases Display Distance Radar Standby/ON Selector
• LEFT: Cycles between RWS, TWS and VS modes
Select Radar Mode OSB (STBY Crossed Out = Radar ON)
• RIGHT: Changes Azimuth Scan Range
• DEPRESSED (PUSHED): MFCD Refresh S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch
147
KJL-7 RADAR
2.1.4 – Air-to-Air Radar TWS Mode
THUNDER
TWS is the default search mode when INTC (Intercept) Master Mode is selected for air-to-air
combat.
JF-17
TWS (Track While Scan) mode combines the information unique to RWS and STT (Single Target
Track) modes. Generally, the TWS display is very similar to the RWS display, however, each
contact has a vector line that points in the direction of the contact’s heading and a digital
altitude indication below it. It permits having detailed target data on a contact while still being
able to scan for other targets. Radar can track up to 10 targets at once in TWS mode.
When combined with the SD-10, TWS provides a powerful ability to engage multiple targets
quickly. Nevertheless, the target tracking reliability is less than that of SAM and even more so
than STT. Unlike STT though, a TWS launch with SD-10 will not provide the enemy aircraft with
a radar lock and launch indication. As such, the first warning the enemy pilot will likely get is
when the active radar seeker of the SD-10 missile goes active near the target.
TWS has several restrictions. The radar will attempt to build track files for each contact, but
given a large scan volume, there will be a sizable refresh time between scans. During each scan
the radar will try to predict the position of the contact for the next scan. If, however the target
takes evasive, high-G maneuvers and quickly changing its trajectory and speed, the radar can
lose the track by making an incorrect track file prediction. Using such a defensive tactic, the
hunter can quickly become the hunted.
148
KJL-7 RADAR
2.1.4 – Air-to-Air Radar TWS Mode
THUNDER
In TWS mode, the S2 Sensor Control Switch has the following functions:
• FWD: Increases Display Distance T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch)
JF-17
• AFT: Decreases Display Distance • UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)

• LEFT: Cycles between RWS, TWS and VS modes • MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation)
• RIGHT: No function. • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
• DEPRESSED (PUSHED): MFCD Refresh, resets default MFCD menus for selected mode

Select Radar Mode OSB

TWS Page
Note: No target has been “bugged”
yet with the TDC
TDC
149
KJL-7 RADAR Direction of
2.1.4 – Air-to-Air Radar TWS Mode Bugged HPT
THUNDER
TWS is used in the following manner: HPT Time to

1. Set MMS (Master Mode Switch) to INTC. TWS is selected by default. Impact (sec)
JF-17
2. Set radar mode from STANDBY to ON by pressing the Radar

Standby/ON Selector.
3. Verify that Center MFCD is set as the Sensor of Interest (SOI). An
asterisk will indicate the radar screen is the SOI. If another
sensor/display is set as the SOI, press Sensor Select Switch AFT.
4. Slew the TDC (Target Designator Controller) over a desired target and
“bug” him by pressing the T5/TDC PRESS (ENTER). This is NOT a radar
lock; you have merely set a target as the HPT (High Priority Target), Radar Standby/ON Selector
which is represented as a circle. Other SPTs (Secondary Priority Targets)
MFCD Selected Asterisk (STBY Crossed Out = Radar ON)
will be displayed as well without a circle.
• Note: to cycle between the HPT (High Priority Target) and SPT
(Secondary Priority Target), press the Sensor Control (S2) Radar Mode
switch LEFT.
5. If you press the TDC (ENTER) a second time, you will radar lock the
desired target to STT (Single Target Track) mode.
Weapon Max Range
HPT (High Priority Target, Bugged)
SPT (Secondary Priority Target)

HPT Data:
Distance
TDC
Time to Impact
Closure Speed
Weapon No Escape Zone Target Aspect
Distance (nm) and

Bearing from TDC to HPT

T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch 150
Weapon Min Range
KJL-7 RADAR
2.1.5 – Air-to-Air Radar VS Mode
THUNDER
Velocity Search mode is used for long range detection primarily against nose aspect targets,
giving velocity and azimuth information, but no range information. The vertical scale on the
JF-17
screen will be in terms of airspeed.

MFCD Selected Asterisk
VS is selected in the following manner:
1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) UP to INTC (Intercept). Center MFCD will
automatically be set as the Sensor of Interest (SOI), as shown by the asterisk.
3. Press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select Button) until radar mode is cycled to VS.
Radar Standby/ON Selector


Speed Scale (kts)
Left/Right (Azimuth) T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch 151

KJL-7 RADAR
2.1.5 – Air-to-Air Radar VS Mode
THUNDER
In VS mode, the S2 Sensor Control Switch has the following functions:

• FWD: Increases Display Distance
JF-17
• AFT: Decreases Display Distance

• LEFT: Cycles between RWS, TWS and VS modes
Speed Scale Selector
• DEPRESSED (PUSHED): MFCD Refresh
12 = 1200 kts
Contact Closure Speed: 24 = 2400 kts
approx. 690 kts
VS Cursor (Controlled by TDC)

• Top Left: Closure Speed (x10 kts). 69
means a 690 kts closure speed.
• Top Right: Upper Altitude (14000 ft)
• Bottom Right: Lower Altitude (6000 ft)
Contact Closure Speed:

approx. 600 kts

152
KJL-7 RADAR
2.1.6 – Air-to-Air Radar SAM (ASM/NAM) Mode
THUNDER
SAM (Situational Awareness Mode) is a hybrid mode between RWS and STT. When locked a target in RWS mode, radar
enters SAM mode. In SAM mode, radar will periodically scan the locked target while scanning the whole area. In SAM
JF-17
mode, the controls are basically same as in RWS.

To enter SAM/ASM (Automatic Situational Mode):
1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) UP to INTC (Intercept) T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch)
2. Set radar mode from STANDBY to ON by pressing the Radar Standby/ON Selector. • UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
3. Verify that Center MFCD is set as the Sensor of Interest (SOI). An asterisk will indicate the radar screen is the SOI. If • MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation)
another sensor/display is set as the SOI, press Sensor Select Switch AFT. • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
4. Press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select Button) until radar mode is cycled to RWS.
5. Slew the TDC over a target, then use the T5/TDC PRESS (ENTER) to “Bug” the contact. T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch
6. Radar mode will transition from RWS to SAM/ASM (Automatic Situational Mode). This sets a target as the HPT (High
Priority Target), which is represented as a circle. T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
7. ASM will automatically set radar scan width and bars based on range:
• If Range is greater than 20 nm: ASM sets a 30 deg scan with 2 bars. S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch
• If Range is less than 20 nm: ASM sets a 15 deg scan with 4 bars.

Select Radar
Mode OSB
TDC
HPT (Bugged)
SAM ASM Mode
153
KJL-7 RADAR S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch
THUNDER
In SAM mode, the S2 Sensor Control Switch has the following functions:
• LEFT: Cycles between SAM (Situational Awareness Mode) ASM (Automatic Situational
JF-17
Mode) sub-mode and NAM (Normal Awareness Mode) sub-mode

• DEPRESSED (PUSHED): Unlocks HPT (High Priority Target)
Direction of
Bugged Contact
SAM ASM/NAM Sub-Mode Selected
TDC

Weapon Max Range
Weapon No Escape Zone
HPT (High Priority Target) HPT Data:

Distance
Bugged Contact Time
Time to Impact
Closure Speed to Impact (sec)
Target Aspect
Weapon Min Range 154

Select Radar
KJL-7 RADAR Mode OSB

THUNDER
To enter SAM/NAM (Normal Awareness Mode):

JF-17

1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) UP to INTC (Intercept)
3. Verify that Center MFCD is set as the Sensor of Interest (SOI). An asterisk will indicate the
radar screen is the SOI. If another sensor/display is set as the SOI, press Sensor Select
Switch AFT.
4. Press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select Button) until radar mode is cycled to
RWS.
5. Slew the TDC over a target, then use the T5/TDC PRESS (ENTER) to “Bug” the contact. TDC
6. Radar mode will transition from RWS to SAM/ASM (Automatic Situational Mode). This sets
a target as the HPT (High Priority Target), which is represented as a circle. SAM NAM Mode
HPT (Bugged)
7. Press S2 Sensor Control Switch LEFT to cycle between SAM (Situational Awareness Mode)
ASM (Automatic Situational Mode) sub-mode and NAM (Normal Awareness Mode) sub-
mode. S1: SS (Sensor
8. NAM will allow you to keep changing radar scan azimuth and bar setting as desired. Selection) Switch


155
KJL-7 RADAR
2.1.7 – Air-to-Air Radar ACM Modes
THUNDER
2.1.7.1 – VT (Vertical Scan) Mode T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch)

JF-17
VT (Vertical Scan) Mode will scan in a 10°× 50° vertical area. • MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation)
To enter ACM VT mode:
2. Select ACM Mode by pressing the S1 Sensor Selection Switch FWD.
3. Select ACM VT Sub-Mode by pressing the S2 Sensor Control Switch AFT.
4. In ACM sub modes, radar will automatically scan and lock target with a max lock target range of 10
nm. When a target is locked, radar will exit ACM mode automatically and go in STT (Radar Lock).
5. You can exit ACM mode by pressing the MMS (Master Mode Switch) UP to INTC (Intercept)
DOGFIGHT VT Mode
DOGFIGHT VT Mode
156
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
2.1.7.1 – VT (Vertical Scan) Mode

JF-17
ACM VT Mode ON (No Lock)

157
ACM VT Mode ON (With STT Lock)
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
2.1.7.2 – BS (Boresight) Mode T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch)

JF-17
BS (Boresight) Mode Radar will scan in cone with diameter of 4° • MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation)
To enter ACM BS mode:
3. Select ACM BS Sub-Mode by pressing the S2 Sensor Control Switch FWD.
nm. When a target is locked, radar will exit ACM mode automatically and go in STT (Radar Lock).
5. You can exit ACM mode by pressing the MMS (Master Mode Switch) UP to INTC (Intercept)
DOGFIGHT BS Mode
DOGFIGHT BS Mode 158

KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
2.1.7.2 – BS (Boresight) Mode

JF-17
ACM BS Mode ON (No Lock)

159
ACM BS Mode ON (With STT Lock)
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
2.1.7.3 – HA (Heads-Up Display Area) Mode T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch)
JF-17
HA (Heads-Up Display Area) Mode radar will scan whole HUD area. • MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation)
To enter ACM HA mode:
3. Select ACM HA Sub-Mode by pressing the S2 Sensor Control Switch RIGHT.
nm. When a target is locked, radar will exit ACM mode automatically and go in STT (Radar Lock). Radar Standby/ON Selector
5. You can exit ACM mode by pressing the MMS (Master Mode Switch) UP to INTC (Intercept) (STBY Crossed Out = Radar ON)
DOGFIGHT HA Mode
DOGFIGHT HA Mode 160

KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
2.1.7.3 – HA (Heads-Up Display Area) Mode

JF-17
ACM HA Mode ON (No Lock)

161
ACM HA Mode ON (With STT Lock)
KJL-7 RADAR • UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
2.1.8 – Air-to-Air Radar STT Mode (Radar Lock) • MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation)
THUNDER
STT (Single Target Track) Mode is basically a radar lock mode.

JF-17
To enter STT mode:

2. Enter either RWS, TWS, VS, SAM or ACM radar mode.
3. Acquire Radar Lock: T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
1. If TWS mode is selected:
a) Slew the TDC (Target Designator Controller) over a desired target and “bug” him by pressing
the T5/TDC PRESS (ENTER). This is NOT a radar lock; you have merely set a target as the HPT
(High Priority Target), which is represented as a circle. Other SPTs (Secondary Priority Targets)
will be displayed as well without a circle.
b) Press the TDC (ENTER) a second time to radar lock the desired target to STT (Single Target T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch
Track) mode.
c) You can unlock target by using the S2 Sensor Control Switch DEPRESS.
2. If RWS or VS mode is selected: S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch
a) Slew the TDC (Target Designator Controller) over a desired target and press the TDC (ENTER)
to transfer from RWS to SAM mode. This is NOT a radar lock; you have merely set a target as
the HPT (High Priority Target), which is represented as a circle. Other SPTs (Secondary Priority
Targets) will be displayed as well without a circle.
b) Press the TDC (ENTER) a second time to radar lock the desired target to STT (Single Target
Track) mode.
c) You can unlock target by using the S2 Sensor Control Switch DEPRESS.
3. If any ACM sub-modes is selected:
a) radar will automatically scan and lock target with a max lock target range of 10 nm. When a
target is locked, radar will exit ACM mode automatically and go in STT (Radar Lock).
b) You can exit ACM mode by pressing the MMS (Master Mode Switch) UP to INTC (Intercept)

162
TD (Target Designation) Box
KJL-7 RADAR • Arrow > on the left of the box indicates target
is within max range.
2.1.8 – Air-to-Air Radar STT Mode (Radar Lock) • Arrow ^ below the box indicates target is
within no-escape zone.
THUNDER
• Arrow v above the box indicates target is

beyond the no-escape zone.
JF-17
• Arrow < on the right of the TD box indicates

ASE (Allowable target is at minimum range.
Steering Error) Circle
STT Mode Selected
SHOOT Cue Radar Standby/ON Selector
TD (Target
Designation) Box
Weapon Max Range

ASE (Allowable
Steering Error) Circle
Range (nm) Locked Target
Closure Speed (kts)

Target Aspect Control Aiming Point
TOF (Time of Flight)
Weapon Minimum Range Locked Target Data:

STT Mode Selected Distance
Time to Impact
Closure Speed
Target Aspect
163
KJL-7 RADAR (STBY Crossed Out = Radar ON)
2.1.9 – Air-to-Air Radar DTT Mode (Radar Lock)
DTT Mode
THUNDER
DTT (Dual Target Track) Mode is basically a radar lock mode to lock one target (HPT) while tracking a
second one (SPT).
JF-17
To enter DTT mode:

1. Set radar mode from STANDBY to ON by pressing the Radar Standby/ON Selector. HPT (High Priority Target)
2. Enter TWS radar mode.
3. Acquire Radar Lock:
a) Slew the TDC (Target Designator Controller) over a desired target and “bug” him by
pressing the T5/TDC PRESS (ENTER). This is NOT a radar lock; you have merely set a target
as the HPT (High Priority Target), which is represented as a circle. SPT (Secondary Priority Target)
b) Slew the TDC over another target and “bug” him as well by pressing the T5/TDC PRESS
(ENTER). This contact will become a SPT (Secondary Priority Target) and it will be displayed
as well, but without a circle.
c) You will then enter DTT (Dual Target Track) mode. HPT Data:
d) To switch between HPT and SPT, press the S2 Sensor Control switch LEFT. Distance
4. Press the TDC (ENTER) a second time to radar lock the desired target to STT (Single Target Track) Time to Impact
mode. Closure Speed
5. You can unlock target by using the S2 Sensor Control Switch DEPRESS. Target Aspect
STT Mode
S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch • UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
HPT (High Priority Target)

Radar Locked
T5: TDC (Target Designator

Controller) Switch
T6: Radar Antenna
Elevation Switch 164
RDR (RADAR) PAGE SELECTED
KJL-7 RADAR A/G MASTER MODE SELECTED
MAP (GROUND MAPPING) MODE
2.2.1 – Air-to-Ground Operating Modes
THUNDER
The Air-to-Ground Radar features several operating modes, each designed for specific tasks ranging
JF-17
from target detection and tracking to navigation and ranging. These modes will never be as precise as a
targeting pod, but it has a much longer range and can see through cloud layers obscuring the view.
Using these functionalities will be entirely up to you and the type of mission you’re flying… and the
type of ordnance you have available.
Here is an overview of the different modes available:
• Ground Mapping (MAP)

• Expanded Mapping Sub-Modes
• EXP (Expanded Map)
• DBS1 (Doppler-Beam-Sharpened Level 1)
• DBS2 (Doppler-Beam-Sharpened Level 2)
• FTT (Fixed Target Track)

• Ground Moving Target Indicator (GMTI)
• GMTT (Ground Moving Target Track)
• Weather Awareness (WA)
• Terrain Avoidance (TA)
• Sea Search (SEA) Modes

• SEA1 Mode
• SEA2 Mode
• Sea Single Target Track (SSTT)
• Sea Moving Target Track (SMTT) 165
KJL-7 RADAR T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch)
2.2.2 – Air-to-Ground Radar MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode • MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation)
THUNDER
Display
JF-17
The Ground Mapping mode is a B-scope raster scan of terrain ahead of the aircraft. Image intensity is a
function of the strength of a radar return. Certain ground features will have higher intensity (e.g., buildings or
vehicles) and others will have lower intensity (e.g., water). Terrain or tall structures will impede the radar
beam from traveling further, creating distinctive shadows, giving the resulting image the appearance of an
elevation relief map.
Keep in mind that in order to display the ground mapping overlay on the radar page, the A/G Master Mode
should be selected with T1 (Master Mode Switch, MMS) set DOWN to AG (Air-to-Ground) and the “MAP”
Mode should be selected from the RDR (Radar) page. B-Scope (Top-Down)
Display Format
Up: Forward
Right
166
KJL-7 RADAR
2.2.2 – Air-to-Ground Radar MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode
THUNDER
Display
JF-17
Normally, the radar operating in SLV (Slave) mode only scans the area around the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest, like a selected Steerpoint or a targeting
pod area/point track), regardless of aircraft location or heading. If the SPI moves outside the radar field of view, the radar antenna is boresighted.
To scan directly on the radar cursor instead, use Snowplow (SP) Mode.
SLV (Slave): Radar Scanning on selected SPI (Steerpoint) SP (Snowplow): Scanning on Radar Cursor
Radar Cursor (not slaved

SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
to selected steerpoint)
set to selected Steerpoint
SP (Snowplow)
SLV (Slave) Mode Selected Mode Selected
167
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
Display
JF-17
The Radar Crosshair symbology indicates whether a Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) is designated from the radar page.
No Target Designated Steerpoint Designated as SPI Target Designated as SPI with Radar Crosshair
Radar
Radar
Crosshair
Crosshair
Radar
Steerpoint selected as SPI Crosshair
(Sensor Point of Interest)
168
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
Display
JF-17
Regions that do not provide radar returns are black (such as water). The bright/green regions are Range Scale (nm)
generally man-made structures (buildings, power lines, roads, etc.) or mountains.
Your Position
Pagan Island
169
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
Display
JF-17
Some of the black areas on the MAP display are part

of the radar shadow, which are regions behind hills
or mountains that the radar cannot see behind.
Radar Shadow (behind mountains)

170
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
RBM (Real Beam Mode) Image Processing

JF-17
The Radar Sub-Mode OSB (Option Select Button) on the MAP radar page allows you to select between Real Beam Mode (RBM) and other expanded image processing modes
(EXP, DBS1, DBS2), which will be explained later. The default ground mapping mode selected is RBM (Real Beam Mode), which uses raw radar data to quickly produce an image.
The resolution is lesser than EXP, DBS1 or DBS2 sub-modes, but you get a faster image generation.
RBM Selected
171
KJL-7 RADAR Air-to-Ground Radar Sub-Mode Selector
• RBM (Real Beam Mode)
2.2.2 – Air-to-Ground Radar MAP (Ground Mapping) Mode •
•
EXP (Expanded)
DBS1 (Doppler Beam Sharpening 1)
THUNDER
• DBS2 (Doppler Beam Sharpening 2)

Display Symbology
Controls (MAP Page) Brightness Control
Radar Silent Mode Selector
JF-17
Here is an overview of the controls available

from the Radar Ground Mapping (MAP) Page. Radar MAP Control (CNTL) Page Selector
Air-to-Ground Radar Mode Selector

• MAP (Ground Mapping)
• GMTI (Ground Moving Target Indicator) Radar Distance
• SEA1 (Sea Mode 1, Stationary + Moving Naval Targets) Scale Setting (nm)
• SEA2 (Sea Mode 2, Stationary Naval Targets)
• BCN (Beacon)
• WA (Weather Awareness)
• TA (Terrain Avoidance)
Frozen Radar Map
Function Selector
Radar Azimuth Selector (Coverage for half the total azimuth)

(can be set to 10/25/60 deg) Radar Snowplow/Slave
Mode Selector
Radar Antenna Elevation Caret
Radar Speed Gate
Radar Gain Level Setting (LOW/HIGH)
Indicator and Controls
Ownship Airspeed (kts)
Radar Standby Mode Selector

Radar Azimuth Indicator (Coverage for half the total azimuth)
Ownship Radar Altitude (ft)

Display Brightness Control
SOI (Sensor of Interest) Asterisk
Display Contrast • Indicates the radar page is the 172
Control sensor of interest.
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
Horizon Line Repeater

Controls (MAP Page)
JF-17
Flight Path Marker (FPM) Repeater

Time-To-Go (TGO)
• Displays time until reaching the SPI
Selected Waypoint Symbol and Number (Sensor Point of Interest)
Range (nm) to SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)

Radar Crosshair/Cursor • In that case, the SPI is on the Radar Crosshair.
• The crosshairs indicate the current sensor
point of interest (SPI). When in snowplow
mode, the TDC control on the throttle can
be used to move the crosshairs and change
the SPI.
173
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
Controls (MAP - CNTL Sub-Page)

JF-17
Radar MAP Control

Here is an overview of the controls available (CNTL) Page Selected
from the Radar Ground Mapping (MAP) CNTL
(Control) Sub-Page.
Beacon (BCN) Selector
Declutter (DCLT) Function
174
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
Controls (HOTAS)
JF-17
Here is an overview of the HOTAS controls available for the radar when in air-to-ground mode.
• T1 (Master Mode Switch): DOWN sets Master Mode to Air-to-Ground
• T6: UP/DOWN Controls Radar Antenna Elevation
• T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch controls Radar Crosshair/Cursor
• S2 (Sensor Control) Switch:
• FWD: Increases Display Range
• AFT: Decreases Display Range
• RIGHT: Changes Azimuth Scan Range and/or cancels DBS/EXP Sub-Mode
• LEFT: Cycles between EXP, DBS1 and DBS2 Sub-Modes.
• PUSH: Discards Target Designation

• UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch
T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch 175

3
KJL-7 RADAR
4a
THUNDER
How to Select A/G Ground Mapping Mode

JF-17
To display the ground mapping overlay on the Radar page:
1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) DOWN to AG (Air-to-Ground). Center MFCD will automatically be set as the
Sensor of Interest (SOI), as shown by the asterisk. By default, MAP mode should already be selected.
3. If another Air-to-Ground Radar mode was selected, press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select Button) to enter
the Air-to-Ground Radar Mode selection menu.
4. Press on the OSB next to “MAP” to select Ground Mapping Mode.
5. Adjust Gain Control – As required.
6. You can control the radar antenna with the T6 Radar Antenna Elevation switch.

2
4b
5 TDC Cursor

Ground Map Mode, RBM Normal Scan EXP Sub-Mode
KJL-7 RADAR
2.2.3 – Expanded Modes
THUNDER
Introduction to EXP Modes

JF-17
When ground mapping (MAP) mode is selected, you can select

« expanded » sub-modes, which can be seen as a « zoom » feature that
can be used to designate target points for weapons delivery. These
modes are called « Doppler-Beam-Sharpened » (DBS) modes since they
are high resolution mapping modes used to identify and target detail
down to individual structures or vehicles.
From the radar page or any expanded mode currently selected, you can
access any of the three expanded sub-modes:
• EXP Map
• EXP is the lowest resolution expanded mode, with a 4:1
expansion of the normal RBM scan area. The EXP format

contains most of the same options and symbology described
for the MAP mode. DBS1 Sub-Mode DBS2 Sub-Mode
• DBS1 Map
• DBS1 (Doppler Beam Sharpening mode level 1) is the next
higher resolution mode up from EXP, but it has a smaller
rendered area with a zoom-in scale of 8:1. The DBS mode can
create a higher-resolution image than the enhanced ground
mapping mode, though it takes longer to render the image.
DBS level 1 produces a 8:1 sharpening. The rendered area is
the same size as EXP mode.
• DBS2 Map
• DBS2 (Doppler Beam Sharpening mode level 2) is the highest
resolution expanded mode available. Level 2 creates an even
sharper image, at 32:1, but raster takes longer than DBS1. The
rendered area depends on range to target.
177
KJL-7 RADAR
2.2.3 – Expanded Modes 3
THUNDER
2.2.3.1 – EXP Sub-Mode

JF-17
How to Select EXP Sub-Mode

2
1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) DOWN to AG (Air-to-Ground). Center MFCD will
automatically be set as the Sensor of Interest (SOI), as shown by the asterisk. By default, MAP mode
should already be selected.
3. If another Air-to-Ground Radar mode was selected, press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option
Select Button) to enter the Air-to-Ground Radar Mode selection menu and press on the OSB next to
“MAP” to select Ground Mapping Mode.
4. Make sure Snowplow Mode is selected (OSB next to SP/SLV toggles Snowplow and Slave Modes).
5. Adjust Gain and Contrast– As required.
7. Slew the TDC Cursor (Radar Crosshair) over the region you want to expand using the T5 TDC Switch.
4
5
Gain
• DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground) TDC Cursor
7 (Radar Crosshair)
1
5
Contrast
MFCD Selected Asterisk 178

KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
2.2.3.1 – EXP Sub-Mode

JF-17
How to Select EXP Sub-Mode

8. Once Radar Crosshair is over the region you want to expand, either press the
S2/SC (Sensor Control) Switch LEFT or use the OSB next to the Radar Sub-Mode
Aircraft Heading
Selector to switch to from RBM (Real Beam Mode) to EXP (Expanded) Sub-Mode.
9. The air-to-ground radar will automatically adjust its range to give you a better
view of the region you just expanded.
10. Once region is expanded with a 4:1 expansion of the normal scan area, a
EXP Region
Situational Awareness Cue line appears on the display to show where the Radar
Crosshair/Cursor is in relationship to the aircraft.
11. If you want to return to the normal RBM (Non-Expanded) mode, you can toggle
between other Expanded Modes using the S2/SC (Sensor Control) Switch LEFT or
When in an expanded sub-mode, the Radar Crosshair is fixed at the center of
use the OSB next to the Radar Sub-Mode Selector.
the screen, and using the Radar Cursor/Enable switch control slews the
TDC Cursor image, not the crosshairs. Take note that using the FZ (Freeze) function is
8 (Radar Crosshair) helpful to keep the radar image frozen while slewing.
8 S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch

10
Situational
Awareness Cue
179
Normal View EXP View
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
2.2.3.2 – DBS1 Sub-Mode

TDC Cursor
JF-17
(Radar Crosshair)
How to Select DBS1 Sub-Mode
DBS1 (Doppler Beam Sharpening mode level 1) is the next
higher resolution mode up from EXP. The DBS mode can create
a higher-resolution image than the enhanced ground mapping
mode, though it takes longer to render the image. DBS level 1
produces a 8:1 sharpening and zoom. The rendered area is the
same size as EXP mode.
DBS1 Sub-Mode can be selected with the S2/SC (Sensor

Control) Switch LEFT or the OSB next to the Radar Sub-Mode
Selector once you have already expanded a region with EXP
Sub-Mode.
You can use the T5 TDC switch on the throttle to slew and radar DBS1 View
crosshair and designate a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) by
pressing the T5 TDC PRESS switch (ENTER). The image will re-
center around this designated SPI. You can also slew the TDC to
the boundary of the radar frame to move the scanned area in S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch
the corresponding direction. FZ (Freeze)
Function
The Situational Awareness Cue line appears on the display to
show where the Radar Crosshair/Cursor is in relationship to the Situational
aircraft. Take note that using the FZ (Freeze) function is helpful Awareness Cue
to keep the radar image frozen.
If you want to return to the normal RBM (Non-Expanded) mode,

you can toggle between other Expanded Modes using the S2/SC
(Sensor Control) Switch LEFT or use the OSB next to the Radar
Sub-Mode Selector.
180
Normal View EXP View
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER

TDC Cursor
JF-17
(Radar Crosshair)
DBS2 (Doppler Beam Sharpening mode level 2) is the highest
resolution expanded mode available. Level 2 creates an even sharper
image, at 32:1, but raster takes longer than DBS1. The rendered area
depends on the range to target.
DBS2 Sub-Mode can be selected with the S2/SC (Sensor Control)

Switch LEFT or the OSB next to the Radar Sub-Mode Selector once
you have already expanded a region with EXP Sub-Mode, then
expanded it again with DBS1 Sub-Mode.
You can use the T5 TDC switch on the throttle to slew and radar
crosshair and designate a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) by pressing

the T5 TDC PRESS switch (ENTER). The image will re-center around
this designated SPI. You can also slew the TDC to the boundary of
the radar frame to move the scanned area in the corresponding
direction.
The Situational Awareness Cue line appears on the display to show

where the Radar Crosshair/Cursor is in relationship to the aircraft.
Take note that using the FZ (Freeze) function is helpful to keep the
radar image frozen.
If you want to return to the normal RBM (Non-Expanded) mode, you

can toggle between other Expanded Modes using the S2/SC (Sensor
Control) Switch LEFT or use the OSB next to the Radar Sub-Mode
Selector.
181
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER

Targeting Pod SLAV (Slaved) to SPI
JF-17
designated from air-to-ground radar

As you can see, even with the best Expanded Mode setting, the resolution isn’t amazing. Some terrain features are
recognizable, but you will definitely need to use other sensors like the targeting pod to have a good visual of a target before
dropping ordnance on it.
Targeting Pod Feed

Beirut Rafic Hariri

Airport
Radar SPI (Sensor

Point of Interest)
182
KJL-7 RADAR
2.2.4 – Target Designation: Fixed Target Track (FTT) 3
THUNDER
How to Designate/Undesignate a Target

JF-17
1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) DOWN to AG (Air-to-Ground). Center MFCD will automatically
be set as the Sensor of Interest (SOI), as shown by the asterisk. By default, MAP mode should already 2
be selected.
3. If another Air-to-Ground Radar mode was selected, press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select
Button) to enter the Air-to-Ground Radar Mode selection menu and press on the OSB next to “MAP”
to select Ground Mapping Mode.
7. Slew the TDC Cursor (Radar Crosshair) over the region you want to expand/designate using the T5 TDC
Switch.
4
5
Gain
7 (Radar Crosshair)
1
5
Contrast

KJL-7 RADAR
2.2.4 – Target Designation: Fixed Target Track (FTT)
THUNDER

JF-17
8. Target Designation via the ground radar, also called Fixed Target Track (FTT), can be
performed from any air-to-ground radar Ground Mapping mode (RBM/Normal, EXP,
DBS1, DBS2). If you want to use Expanded sub-modes, either press the S2/SC (Sensor
Control) Switch LEFT or use the OSB next to the Radar Sub-Mode Selector to switch to
desired Sub-Mode. The air-to-ground radar will automatically adjust its range to give
you a better view of the region you just expanded. If you want to return to
RBM/Normal (Non-Expanded), you can toggle between other Expanded Modes using 8b
9b
S2/SC (Sensor Control) Switch LEFT. S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch
9. To designate a target/SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) on the Radar Crosshair position, use T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
the T5 TDC PRESS switch control (ENTER). This will set the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
at this location and center the radar image around this SPI.
9a TDC Cursor
(Radar Crosshair) 9c SPI (Sensor Point of
SPI Not Designated Interest) Designated
8a 8b
184
KJL-7 RADAR
2.2.4 – Target Designation: Fixed Target Track (FTT)
THUNDER

JF-17
10. Use the T5 TDC PRESS switch control (ENTER) a second time. This will perform a ground-stabilized Fixed Target
Track (FTT). The radar will then focus all its energy on the landmark/feature you just designated.
11. To un-designate target and exit FTT, set the S2 Sensor Control Switch to PRESS (BACKSPACE).
10b
10c
10a
Time-to-Go (to SPI)
Range to
SPI/Crosshair (nm)
185
KJL-7 RADAR
2.2.4 – Target Designation: Fixed Target Track (FTT) 13a
THUNDER

JF-17
12. When in FTT, the designated location becomes the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest). The radar will
continue to track the target location while line-of-sight (LOS) is maintained. If the designated
location moves outside the radar field of view, the radar will slew to boresight until the target
returns into the radar FOV, at which point the radar will attempt to reacquire the target.
13. If you want to slave other sensors like the Targeting Pod to the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
designated via the radar, uncage the targeting pod and set the SP/SLAV (Snowplow/Slave)
Function to SLAV. The targeting pod will then be slaved to the Fixed Target Track.
13b
TGP Slaved to Radar SPI
FTT (Fixed Target Track)
Radar SPI
Diamond: Radar-Designated Target
Circle: Targeting Pod Slaved to SPI
186
KJL-7 RADAR 3b
2.2.5 – GMTI (Ground Moving Target Indicator) Mode

THUNDER
Display
JF-17
The Ground Moving Target Indicator (GMTI) radar mode scans for and highlights moving targets, detected by their 4a
Doppler shift. Detected targets are displayed as white bricks. The shaded area of the display shows antenna azimuth
coverage and the ground mapping (MAP) overlay, which is interleaved with the moving radar contacts.
In order to display the GMTI data on the radar page:
1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) DOWN to AG (Air-to-Ground). Center MFCD will automatically be set as the
3. Press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select Button) to enter the Air-to-Ground Radar Mode selection menu.
4. Press on the OSB next to “GMTI” to select Ground Moving Target Indicator Mode.
3a 2
GMTI (Ground Moving Target Indicator) Radar Mode Selected
4b
187
KJL-7 RADAR Ground Mapping Overlay
2.2.5 – GMTI (Ground Moving Target Indicator) Mode (Shaded Area)
THUNDER
Display
JF-17
5. To display ground mapping overlay, make sure “RBM” (Real Beam Mode) option is active. 5b
Moving Target
Radar Returns
5a
Up: Forward
6
Right
B-Scope (Top-Down) Display Format
188
KJL-7 RADAR
2.2.5 – GMTI (Ground Moving Target Indicator) Mode Air-to-Ground Radar Sub-Mode Selector
• RBM (Real Beam Mode) Radar GMTI Control
THUNDER
• EXP (Expanded) (CNTL) Page Selector

Controls (GMTI Page)
JF-17
Controls for the GMTI page are almost identical to the controls of the MAP
(Ground Mapping) page. Display range and azimuth settings are modified in
the same manner. However, there is one significant difference with MAP:
• In GMTI, the field-of-view sub-modes can only be RBM or EXP. DBS sub-
mode are not available in GMTI. Switching between RBM and EXP can
only be performed by using S2/SC (Sensor Control) Switch LEFT.
Air-to-Ground Radar Mode Selector

• MAP (Ground Mapping)
• GMTI (Ground Moving Target Indicator)
• SEA1 (Sea Mode 1, Stationary + Moving Naval Targets)

• BCN (Beacon)
• TA (Terrain Avoidance)
Radar Speed Gate

Setting (LOW/HIGH)
S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch 189

KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
Controls (GMTI CNTL Page)

JF-17
Radar GMTI Control

(CNTL) Page Selected
190
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
Controls (HOTAS)
JF-17
• RIGHT: Changes Azimuth Scan Range and/or cancels EXP Sub-Mode
• LEFT: Selects EXP Sub-Mode
T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch) S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch


5
KJL-7 RADAR 3

THUNDER
How to Track a Moving Target (GMTT, Ground Moving Target Track)

JF-17
2
automatically be set as the Sensor of Interest (SOI), as shown by the asterisk. By default,
MAP mode should already be selected.
3. Press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select Button) to enter the Air-to-Ground
Radar Mode selection menu. Press on the OSB next to “GMTI” to select Ground Moving
Target Indicator Mode.
4. Make sure Snowplow Mode is selected (OSB next to SP/SLV toggles Snowplow and Slave
Modes).
5. To display ground mapping overlay, make sure “RBM” (Real Beam Mode) option is active.
8. Slew the TDC Cursor (Radar Crosshair) over the region you want to expand/designate using 6 4
the T5 TDC Switch. Gain

8 (Radar Crosshair)
1
6
Contrast
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER

JF-17
9. Moving Target Designation via the ground radar, also called Ground Moving Target
Track (GMTT), can be performed from GMTI (Ground Moving Target Indicator) mode
only. If you want to use EXP (Expanded) sub-mode, press the S2/SC (Sensor Control)
Switch LEFT. The air-to-ground radar will automatically adjust its range to give you a
better view of the region you just expanded. If you want to return to RBM/Normal
(Non-Expanded), use S2/SC (Sensor Control) Switch LEFT.
10. To designate a target/SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) on the Radar Crosshair position, use 9b
10b
the T5 TDC PRESS switch control (ENTER). This will set the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch
at this location and center the radar image around this SPI. T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
10a TDC Cursor

9a SPI Not Designated Interest) Designated
9b
193
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER

JF-17
11. Use the T5 TDC PRESS switch control (ENTER) a second time. This will perform a ground-stabilized Moving
Target Track (GMTT). The radar will then focus all its energy on the moving vehicle you just designated.
12. To un-designate target and exit GMTT, set the S2 Sensor Control Switch to PRESS (BACKSPACE).
11b
11c
11a
Time-to-Go (to SPI)
Range to
SPI/Crosshair (nm)
194
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER

JF-17
14a
13. When in GMTT, the designated/tracked target becomes the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest). The
radar will continue to track the target while line-of-sight (LOS) is maintained. If the designated
Function to SLAV. The targeting pod will then be slaved to the Ground Moving Target Track.
14b
GMTT (Ground Moving Target Track)
Radar SPI
195
KJL-7 RADAR
2.2.6 – WA (Weather Awareness) Mode
THUNDER
Not yet implemented.

JF-17
196
KJL-7 RADAR
2.2.7 – TA (Terrain Avoidance) Mode
THUNDER
The KJL-7 radar has a mode called TA (Terrain Avoidance). Terrain and obstacles that you risk colliding with
JF-17
are displayed in terms of color shades. A specific clearance height symbology is customizable through the TA
CNTL sub-page.
In this mode, the radar range is locked to 10 nm and the azimuth aperture can be set to either 15 or 30 deg.
The radar displays return from the ground in 2 colors depending on the terrain altitude relative to the
clearance height (terrain avoidance margin) set by the pilot:
• Yellow when terrain is within the “clean zone” (200 ft zone below the clearance height / terrain
avoidance margin set by the pilot)
• Red when terrain is within or above the clearance height / terrain avoidance margin set by the pilot. All
the area behind the obstacle hidden from the radar’s line-of-sight will also be rendered in red.
• No color is visible when terrain is below the yellow “clean zone”
In this mode, the radar display is oriented to follow the aircraft bearing. This means that the display is not
oriented to where the aircraft is pointed to but where it’s going.
197
KJL-7 RADAR 3b

THUNDER
To display terrain avoidance data overlay on the Radar page:

JF-17
1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) DOWN to AG (Air-to-Ground). Center MFCD will automatically be set
as the Sensor of Interest (SOI), as shown by the asterisk. By default, MAP mode should already be selected.
2. Set radar mode from STANDBY to ON by pressing the Radar Standby/ON Selector. 4a
3. If another Air-to-Ground Radar mode was selected, press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select
Button) to enter the Air-to-Ground Radar Mode selection menu.
4. Press on the OSB next to “TA” to select Terrain Avoidance Mode.
3a
2 4b
1 T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch)
198
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
To set the Terrain Avoidance Margin:

JF-17
1. Select TA CNTL sub-page.

2. Press the OSBs next to the arrows surrounding the Terrain Avoidance Margin setting (in feet).
3. In this example, the Terrain Avoidance Margin is set to 50 ft. This means that the zones in red shows terrain from
50 ft below you to any terrain above you. Yellow shows terrain within the “clean zone”, which is a 200 ft zone
below the Terrain Avoidance Margin in red, which in this example goes from 50 ft below you to 250 ft below you.
Terrain Avoidance Margin (red)

50 ft, set by pilot in TA CNTL page
200 ft clearance (yellow “Clean Zone”)

below Terrain Avoidance Margin
199
KJL-7 RADAR
2.2.8 – BCN (Beacon) Mode
THUNDER
The Beacon Search (BCN) radar mode is a passive radar mode that detects
JF-17
transmitting radar beacons typically placed by ground personnel. These beacons

are programmed to emit certain codes that the radar can search for and track,
giving you a bearing and distance to the emitter.
A practical application of BCN mode is that a beacon can be placed on the

ground and used with an OAP (Offset Aimpoint), a reference point which can be
used to designate a target (with distance and bearing from the beacon) and
deliver ordnance without having to acquire the target via a sensor like the
targeting pod.
Time-to-Go (to Beacon)
In DCS, the JF-17’s BCN mode is simulated to track TACAN stations.
Range to Beacon (nm)
= Symbol: Beacon detected by radar

Diamond Symbol: Designated SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
200
KJL-7 RADAR 3b

THUNDER
To employ BCN Mode:

JF-17
1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) DOWN to AG (Air-to-Ground). Center MFCD will automatically be set as
the Sensor of Interest (SOI), as shown by the asterisk. By default, MAP mode should already be selected.
3. If another Air-to-Ground Radar mode was selected, press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select Button)
to enter the Air-to-Ground Radar Mode selection menu.
4. Press on the OSB next to “BCN” to select Beacon Search Mode.
6. If desired, select INTL (Interleaved) Mode, which will alternate between RBM (Real Beam Mode, Ground
Mapping) overlay and Beacon Search Mode.
4a
3a
4b
1 T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch)
• UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2

KJL-7 RADAR
8a
THUNDER
7. We want to use Kobuleti’s TACAN (Channel

JF-17
67X) as our beacon.

8. Press on the OSB next to CNTL to enter the
Beacon Control sub-page.
9. Press on the OSB next to BCN 00 to enter
the TACAN Channel.
10. Use OSBs to enter BCN Channel 67.
11. Press on the OSB next to CNTL to exit the
Beacon Control sub-page.
12. When the TACAN beacon (67X) is detected, 7
a “=“ symbol will blink on the radar display.
12 11
8b
10
202
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER
13. Slew the TDC Cursor (Radar Crosshair) over the beacon symbol “=“ you want to track
JF-17
using the T5 TDC Switch.

14. To designate the TACAN beacon as the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), use the T5 TDC
PRESS switch control (ENTER). The diamond indicates the beacon is being tracked by the
radar.
15. Bearing, Time-to-Go and Range to Beacon information is displayed on the radar screen.
16. To un-designate beacon, set the S2 Sensor Control Switch to PRESS (BACKSPACE).
16
13 14 S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch


Time-to-Go (to Beacon)
Range to Beacon (nm)
15
Diamond Symbol: Designated SPI

(Sensor Point of Interest)
14
13
TDC Cursor
(Radar Crosshair)
203
3b
KJL-7 RADAR
2.3.1 – SEA1 Mode
THUNDER
Display
JF-17
The Sea Search radar mode 1 scans for and highlights both moving and stationary naval targets, detected by their Doppler
shift. Detected targets are displayed as white bricks. The size of the bricks changes based on the RCS (radar cross-section) of
the naval target. The shaded area of the display shows antenna azimuth coverage and the ground mapping (MAP) overlay.
4a
In order to display the SEA1 data on the radar page:
1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) DOWN to AG (Air-to-Ground). Center MFCD will automatically be set as the Sensor
of Interest (SOI), as shown by the asterisk. By default, MAP mode should already be selected.
4. Press on the OSB next to “SEA1” to select Sea Search Mode 1.
2
3a SEA1 Radar Mode Selected
4b
204
Ground Mapping Overlay
KJL-7 RADAR (Shaded Area)
2.3.1 – SEA1 Mode

THUNDER
Display
JF-17
5b
Moving Target
Radar Returns
5a
Up: Forward
Right
B-Scope (Top-Down) Display Format
205
Radar Crosshair/Cursor
KJL-7 RADAR • The crosshairs indicate the current sensor point of interest (SPI).
When in snowplow mode, the TDC control on the throttle can Air-to-Ground Radar Sub-Mode Selector
2.3.1 – SEA1 Mode be used to move the crosshairs and change the SPI. • RBM (Real Beam Mode)
• EXP (Expanded)
THUNDER
Display Symbology
Controls (SEA1 Page) Brightness Control
Radar Silent Mode Selector
JF-17
Here is an overview of the controls available

from the Radar Sea Search (SEA1) Page. Radar MAP Control (CNTL) Page Selector
Radar Mode Selector

• MAP (Ground Mapping) Radar Distance
• GMTI (Ground Moving Target Indicator)
Scale Setting (nm)
• SEA1 (Sea Mode 1, Stationary + Moving Naval Targets)
• BCN (Beacon)
• TA (Terrain Avoidance) Frozen Radar Map
Function Selector
Radar Azimuth Selector (Coverage for half the total azimuth)

Radar
(can be set to 10/25/60 deg) Radar Snowplow/Slave
Contact
Mode Selector
Radar Antenna Elevation Caret
Radar Speed Gate
Radar Gain Level Setting (LOW/HIGH)
Indicator and Controls
Ownship Airspeed (kts)
Radar Standby Mode Selector

Radar Azimuth Indicator (Coverage for half the total azimuth)
Ownship Radar Altitude (ft)

Display Brightness Control
SOI (Sensor of Interest) Asterisk
Display Contrast • Indicates the radar page is the 206
Control sensor of interest.
KJL-7 RADAR
2.3.1 – SEA1 Mode
THUNDER
Controls (SEA1 CNTL Page)

JF-17
Radar SEA1 Control

(CNTL) Page Selected
207
KJL-7 RADAR
2.3.1 – SEA1 Mode
THUNDER
Controls (HOTAS)
JF-17
• RIGHT: Changes Azimuth Scan Range and/or cancels EXP Sub-Mode
• LEFT: Selects EXP Sub-Mode
T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch) S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch


3b
KJL-7 RADAR
2.3.2 – SEA2 Mode
THUNDER
Display
JF-17
The Sea Search radar mode 2 scans for and highlights moving naval targets only, detected by their Doppler shift. Detected
targets are displayed as white bricks. The size of the bricks changes based on the RCS (radar cross-section) of the naval
target. The display and controls of SEA2 mode are pretty much identical to SEA1, however ground mapping overlay (RBM) is
unavailable for SEA2. Refer to section 2.3.1 for information about SEA1 controls.
In order to display the SEA2 data on the radar page:
1. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) DOWN to AG (Air-to-Ground). Center MFCD will automatically be set as the 4a
4. Press on the OSB next to “SEA2” to select Sea Search Mode 2.
2
SEA2 Radar Mode Selected
3a
4b
Radar
Contact
209
5
KJL-7 RADAR 3
2.3.3 – SSTT/SMTT (Sea Single/Moving Target Track) Mode
THUNDER
How to Track a Naval Target (SSTT/SMTT, Sea Single/Moving Target Track)

JF-17
2
automatically be set as the Sensor of Interest (SOI), as shown by the asterisk. By default, MAP
mode should already be selected.
3. Press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select Button) to enter the Air-to-Ground Radar
Mode selection menu. Press on the OSB next to “SEA1” to select Sea Search Mode 1.
8. Slew the TDC Cursor (Radar Crosshair) over the region you want to expand/designate using the
T5 TDC Switch.
6 4
Gain
8 (Radar Crosshair)
1
6
Contrast
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER

JF-17
9. Naval Target Designation via the ground radar, also called Sea Single Target Track (SSTT), can be
performed from SEA1 mode only. Moving Target Designation via the ground radar, also called
Sea Moving Target Track (SMTT), can be performed from either SEA1 or SEA2 mode only. If you
want to use EXP (Expanded) sub-mode, press the S2/SC (Sensor Control) Switch LEFT. The air-
to-ground radar will automatically adjust its range to give you a better view of the region you
just expanded. If you want to return to RBM/Normal (Non-Expanded), use S2/SC (Sensor
Control) Switch LEFT. 9b
10b
10. To designate a target/SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) on the Radar Crosshair position, use the T5 S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch
TDC PRESS switch control (ENTER). This will set the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) at this location T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
and center the radar image around this SPI.
10a TDC Cursor

9a SPI Not Designated Interest) Designated
9b
211
KJL-7 RADAR
THUNDER

JF-17
11. Use the T5 TDC PRESS switch control (ENTER) a second time. This will perform a ground-stabilized sea single
target track (SSTT) if the target is stationary or a SMTT (sea moving target track) if the target is moving. The
radar will then focus all its energy on the naval target you just designated.
12. To un-designate target and exit GMTT, set the S2 Sensor Control Switch to PRESS (BACKSPACE).
11b
11c
11a
Time-to-Go (to SPI)
Range to
SPI/Crosshair (nm)
212
KJL-7 RADAR
2.3.3 – SSTT/SMTT (Sea Single/Moving Target Track) Mode 14a
THUNDER

JF-17
13. When in SSTT or SMTT, the designated/tracked target becomes the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest).
The radar will continue to track the target while line-of-sight (LOS) is maintained. If the designated
Function to SLAV. The targeting pod will then be slaved to the Ground Moving Target Track.
14b
SSTT (Sea Single Target Track)
Radar SPI
213
KJL-7 RADAR
2.4 – Radar Lingo & Terminology
THUNDER
• BANDIT: Identified Enemy Aircraft

•
JF-17
BOGEY: Unidentified Aircraft

• SPIKE: Air-to-Air radar is locked on you
• BUDDY SPIKE: Friendly radar is locked on you
• NAILS: RWR contact, which emits radar waves but does not have a radar lock on you
• FOX 1: semi-active radar missile (27R/ER + AIM-7)
• FOX 2: heat-seeking infrared missile (27T/ET + AIM-9 + R-73/60 + PL-5EII)
• FOX 3: active radar missile, meaning the missile tracks to an aircraft’s radar up to a certain
distance, then its internal radar activates (pitbull) (AIM-120/R-77/SD-10)
• RIFLE: AGM-65 Air-to-Ground missile
• RAYGUN: When locking a target with your radar, it is good practice to say “RAYGUN” so
your teammates are aware that you are locking someone. It is often used to identify a
contact as friend or foe. If a person yells “BUDDY SPIKE!”, it’s very likely that you are locking
a friendly contact.
• IFF: meaning “Is he friendly or bandit (enemy)?”
• PITBULL: Any FOX 3 (active radar) missile that starts using its onboard radar for tracking
214
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.1 – INTRODUCTION
THUNDER
The WMD-7 Targeting Pod is a self-contained, multi-sensor targeting and surveillance system. The WMD-7 enables aircrews to detect, acquire, auto-track and identify targets at long ranges for weapon
delivery or non-traditional intelligence, surveillance and reconnaissance missions. WMD-7’s FLIR, charged-coupled device (CCD), laser imaging sensors, advanced image processing and digital video output
JF-17
provide useful imagery of targets on the ground, allowing aircrews to identify and engage targets under a wide range of battlefield conditions.
215
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.2 – DISPLAYS
THUNDER
The targeting pod feed can be displayed on any MFCD (Multi-function Colored Display). Take
note that the POD page on the MFCD is displayed in white and black.
JF-17
3a
To display targeting pod feed: POD Page
1. Select MAIN MENU page Selects TVIR (TV-Guided Missile Feed) or
2. Click on the OSB next to « POD ». WMD-7 (Targeting Pod Feed)
3. Click on the OSB next to « WMD7 » to select the targeting pod feed.
From the MAIN MENU

page, you can access the
targeting pod feed by
pressing the OSB next to
“POD”.
POD Page
3b
216
1 Access Upper Page Main Menu by pressing this button
WMD-7 TARGETING POD IR/CCD Camera Mode Selector
SP (Snowplow) / SLAV (Slave)
3.2 – DISPLAYS IR: Infrared
CCD: Charged Coupled Device (TV) Mode Selector WHOT (White Hot) / BHOT (Black Hot)
THUNDER
TV Setting (Only visible in IR Mode)

WMD7 (Targeting Pod Feed) Selected
Target Range (nm)
JF-17
Field of View
Target Coordinates (Narrow/Wide) Setting
Laser Spot Search (LSS)

OFF / SRC (Search)
Image Gain Increase Button
Targeting Pod View
Gimbal Mount’s Relative Direction Targeting Pod Laser Code
Image Gain Setting
Pitch Position Setting Function
Image Gain Decrease Button
Image Contrast Increase Button Targeting Pod Reticle Laser Emission Mode
Auto / Manual
Image Contrast Level Setting
Image Contrast Decrease Button
Master Arm Status Targeting Pod Re-Focus Function

ARM: Master Arm ON
NO ARM: Master Arm OFF
TRAIN: Training Mode
• Targeting Pod Tracking Mode
Laser Mode • AREA: Area Track Mode
LSD: Laser Designation (Laser is Firing) • INS AREA: Pod loses area track and reverts to last coordinates
LSR: Laser Range Finding saved by the Inertial Navigation System
Blank: Safe/Off • POINT: Point Track Mode (follows moving targets)
• MASK: Pod view is masked by its own housing
Time Until Weapon Impact (sec)
Targeting Pod Laser Code

Laser code used by your targeting MFCD Selected Asterisk 217
pod when designating a target. (Required for TDC to control targeting pod)
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.2 – DISPLAYS
THUNDER
JF-17
TV / CCD Mode WHOT (White Hot) FLIR Mode BHOT (Black Hot) FLIR Mode
218
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.2 – DISPLAYS
THUNDER
The Targeting Pod View Relative Direction symbol on the TGP display can give you a good idea of where the pod is
pointing in relationship to your aircraft. This view direction is represented in a top-down view.
JF-17
Target Coordinates
Targeting Pod is
looking here
Situational Awareness Cue (Targeting

Pod View Relative Direction)
219
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.2 – DISPLAYS
THUNDER
Targeting Pod Reticle

JF-17
Range to SPI (nm)

Closure Ground Speed (kts)

Weapon Status
Degrees required to turn towards
the SPI (Degrees Left/Right)
Master Mode Selected
Time to Target (SPI) in Seconds

Weapon Mode
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
220
WMD-7 TARGETING POD • UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
3.3 – CONTROLS • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
• S1 Sensor Selection Switch sets Targeting Pod MFCD as the SOI (Sensor of Interest).
• LEFT-RIGHT selects left or right MFCD. Asterisk indicates MFCD is set as the
JF-17
Sensor of Interest (SOI).

• AFT cycles between Left, Center and Right MFCD.
• T5/TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch

• T5-TDC LEFT/RIGHT/UP/DOWN Slew Control controls Targeting Pod SPI (Sensor
Point of Interest)
• T5-TDC PRESS Control will lock the ground to either AREA TRACK or POINT
TRACK (if available) and designate SPI (Sensor Point of Interest).
• S2 Sensor Control Switch

• LEFT toggles TV (CCD) or IR Mode
• RIGHT toggles between BHOT (Black Hot) and WHOT (White Hot) in TV Mode
• FWD sets Narrow Field of View T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch
• AFT sets Wide Field of View S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch

• PRESS sets the following:
• When pressed once, unlocks/undesignates SPI (Sensor Point
of Interest).
• When pressed a second time, returns sensor to current focus mode.
• If SNOWPLOW MODE is used, the S2 Sensor Control Switch
PRESSED will return the pod to its resting position (stabilized on the
horizon, following our aircraft heading).
• If SLAVED MODE is used, it will return the pod to its default SPI such as
a selected waypoint.
• T6 Radar Antenna Elevation control

• Adjusts the pod zoom level.

(Required for TDC to control targeting pod)
221
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.4 – SNOWPLOW MODE
THUNDER
Snowplow (SP) mode is selected by using the OSB next to the SP/SLAV menu in the POD
page. Snowplow mode is stabilized on the horizon, following our aircraft heading. It is a
JF-17
basic “look and designate” mode that is done through the targeting pod feed. SP Mode Selected
222
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.5 – SLAVE MODE
THUNDER
SLAVE mode is selected by using the OSB next to the SP/SLAV SP/SLAV Function
menu in the POD page. In this mode, you can slave the targeting
JF-17
pod reticle to a designated point (i.e. waypoint, markpoint, air-to-

air radar lock or a ground radar lock) by locking the desired point,
then selecting the SLAV mode.
As an example, we have set the Air-to-Ground Radar MFCD page Targeting Pod slaved to Ground Radar SPI
as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) and locked a specific point in a town (Sensor Point of Interest) Designation
with the TDC PRESS button. This designated this point as the SPI
(Sensor Point of Interest). Then, we selected SLAV mode, the
targeting pod slew itself automatically to this designated point in
the town.
Ground Radar SPI (Sensor
Point of Interest) Designation
223
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.6 – START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE 5
THUNDER
The laser code on the laser-guided bomb units / laser-guided rockets first needs
4
to be set manually on the ground by the ground crew. We will see that in the
JF-17
Weapons section.
1. Press the CLDP (Convertible Laser Designator Pod) button to allow the
targeting pod laser to be used.
2. Set Master Mode Switch to AG (Air-to-Ground).
3. Go in the MAIN MENU MFCD page and press the OSB (Option Select Button)
next to POD.
4. Press the OSB next to WMD7 to enter the Targeting Pod feed page.
5. Press the OSB next to “OFF” to start warm-up process.
6. Targeting pod will enter a BIT (Built-In Test) mode that starts a warm-up
process that will take about 60 seconds.
7. When targeting pod is ready to be used, the pod ALIGN status will disappear
and be replaced by the pod feed in caged/stowed position.
3b
2
6
T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch) 7
3a 224
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.6 – START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE
THUNDER
8. Press the OSB next to CAGED to uncage targeting pod. This will un-stow the camera.
9. Select desired mode (SP/SNOWPLOW or SLAV/SLAVED) by pressing the OSB next to SP/SLAV. In this case, we will use SNOWPLOW (SP) mode.
JF-17
8a
8a
8b
8b 225
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
THUNDER
10. Press the OSB next to CODE and set the desired laser code the targeting pod will designate with. The default code is
1688, so make sure it matches the code of the laser-guided bombs/rockets (set by ground crew) that will track this
JF-17
laser. In this example, we will use a laser code of 1687.

11. Select either CCD (Charged-Coupled Device/TV) or IR as required. If IR is selected, select either WHOT (White Hot) or
BHOT (Black Hot) infrared imagery setting.
12. Select Laser Designation Mode as desired (we will choose MAN)
• MANUAL mode requires you to use the “Laser Designator ON/OFF” binding (RCTRL+O) to fire the laser and 10b
latch it, displaying a flashing LSD indication. This is useful when “buddy lasing” a target for a friendly aircraft.
• AUTO mode will automatically fire the laser and latch it after you launch a laser-guided weapon. This is much
more efficient since it reduces your workload and avoids overheating the laser designator.
Note: MAN mode is required if you are lasing a target for someone else.
11a
11b
10c
10a
12
226
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
THUNDER
13. Set Targeting Pod page as a SOI (Sensor of Interest) by setting the S1 Sensor Selection Switch
in the direction of the MFCD (Right if POD page is on the RIGHT MFCD). An asterisk will
JF-17
indicate the SOI status.

14. Slew the Targeting Pod reticle on a target using the T5 TDC (Target Designator Controller)
slew controls. Use Radar Antenna Elevation Switch to zoom in or out. Use OSB next to 14b
NAR/WIDE to select narrow or wide field-of-view.
15. When targeting pod reticle is over the target, use the T5 TDC PRESS button (ENTER) to
designate the target as a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest).
16. Once a target is designated, the pod will attempt to enter POINT TRACK (tracks moving
target). If POINT TRACK is not possible, the pod will enter AREA TRACK mode by default if the
target is within 21 nm.
Reticle


• DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground) 16
14/15
14a T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch 13b

S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch 13a 227
3.6 – START-UP & LASING PROCEDURE • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
17. If Laser Designation Mode is set to AUTO, laser will remain in LSR (Laser Ranging)
mode and fire only when a weapon is launched. If Laser Designation Mode is set to
JF-17
MAN, use the « RCTRL+O » binding to manually fire the laser on the target in LSD
(Laser Designate) mode.
18. Laser Designation Mode indication and Laser Code will both flash once laser is firing.
19. To undesignate a target, set the S2 Sensor Control Switch to PRESS (BACKSPACE).
Coordinates

Range
18
Targeting Pod SPI (Sensor Point

Reticle (Circle) of Interest) Data
SPI (Sensor Point
of Interest)
Laser Firing
(Flashing)
Laser Code
(Flashing)
228
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.7 – LASER SPOT SEARCH MODE
THUNDER
The targeting pod can also spot and track a laser from someone else (a friendly JF-17 lasing his own target, or a
JTAC, Joint Tactical Air Controller, calling an air strike). To track another laser:
JF-17
1. Find out what the laser code used by the friendly is (in our case, the friendly JTAC uses code 1688). Make sure
the friendly asset is lasing the target before attempting to track it.
2. Power up the Targeting Pod and set A/G Master Mode as per the previous Power-Up Procedure.
3. Press the OSB next to CODE and set the desired laser code the targeting pod will search for. The default code
is 1688, so make sure it matches the code of the laser designator on the ground.
4. Press the OSB next to LSS OFF (Laser Spot Search) to allow the targeting pod to search for a laser designator
with the code entered previously.
4
3a
3b
229
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.7 – LASER SPOT SEARCH MODE
THUNDER
6
5. While Targeting Pod is searching, it will be in SRC LSS (Search) mode.
6. LSS DET (Detection) indicates that a laser with the correct code has been detected.
JF-17
7. After a few seconds, the Targeting Pod will automatically enter LSS TRK (Track) mode.
8. If you want to slew your TDC and set the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) somewhere else, press OSB next to LSS
TRK to go in OFF LSS mode. You may now slew the TDC and lock it with the T5 TDC PRESS switch (ENTER).
230
2
3.8 – WAYPOINT/MARKPOINT SLAVING • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
The targeting pod can be slaved to a waypoint or a markpoint. 6

Here is an example where the target is on Waypoint No. 2:
JF-17
1. Power up the Targeting Pod as per the previous Power-Up

Procedure.
2. Set A/G Master Mode S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch 6
3. On the UFCP, press “RTN” to select Main UFCP Menu.
4. Press the arrow next to the WAYPOINT data field, enter “02”
to select Waypoint 2, then press the arrow again.
5. Set Targeting Pod page as a SOI (Sensor of Interest) by
setting the S1 Sensor Selection Switch in the direction of the
MFCD (Left if POD page is on the LEFT MFCD). An asterisk
will indicate the SOI status.
6. Use the S2 Sensor Control PRESS control twice to make sure
no SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) is selected. Alternatively,
you can cycle between SP and SLAV mode again.
5 S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch
4a
4c
4b
3 5
231
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.8 – WAYPOINT/MARKPOINT SLAVING
THUNDER
6. Select SLAVE mode by pressing the OSB next to SP/SLAV.

7. Targeting pod will automatically slave itself to Waypoint 2, which will become the new SPI (Sensor Point of Interest).
JF-17
6
232
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.9 – Air-to-Air Operation
THUNDER
3.9.1 - Operation Modes

JF-17
The targeting pod can also be used in air-to-air modes in conjunction with
the radar. This is quite useful to perform visual identifications of air
targets. To use Air-to-Air mode, the WMD-7 TGP (Targeting Pod) requires
the AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) Master Mode to be active. The TGP is
Radar
automatically commanded to the radar line-of-sight when AA master mode
is selected, the radar is tracking a target and the SLAV targeting pod mode
is selected. Alternatively, you can select the targeting pod’s SP (Snowplow)
mode, slew the reticle of the pod and acquire a point track from the pod Targeting Pod
directly. Here are the main A-A operation modes of the pod:
• Radar Slaved: The TGP is slaved to radar’s locked target.

• Point Track (POINT): The TGP itself is tracking a target. Point Track is
accessed by "bumping" the T5 TDC Switch PRESS control while the TGP
page is the SOI (Sensor of Interest), and will attempt to acquire a

recognized target within the reticle.
Targeting Pod (TGP)
Radar Page
Feed slaved to radar lock
SP (Snowplow)
TGP Point Track
233
3.9 – Air-to-Air Operation • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
3.9.2 – Point Track (Slaved from Radar)

JF-17
In order to track a target with the targeting pod: S2: SC (Sensor

Control) Switch
1. Power up the Targeting Pod as per the previous Power-Up
Procedure.
S1: SS (Sensor
2. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) UP to INTC Selection) Switch
(Intercept)
3. Set radar mode from STANDBY to ON by pressing the
Radar Standby/ON Selector.
4. Enter either RWS, TWS, VS, SAM or ACM radar mode. In
this example, we will use RWS mode.
5. Acquire Radar Lock: slew the TDC (Target Designator 6
Controller) over a desired target and press the TDC
(ENTER) to transfer from RWS to SAM mode. Then, press 3
4
the TDC (ENTER) a second time to radar lock the desired

target to STT (Single Target Track) mode.
6. From the targeting pod page, select SLAVE mode by
pressing the OSB next to SP/SLAV.
7. The targeting pod will slew its reticle on the radar locked
target. However, Point Track is not yet active.
Radar Locked TGP Slaved to Radar 7

5
Target (STT)
234
Sensor of Interest (SOI) Asterisk
WMD-7 TARGETING POD
3.9 – Air-to-Air Operation
THUNDER
3.9.2 – Point Track (Slaved from Radar)

JF-17
8. Unlock target and exit radar STT lock by setting the S2

S2: SC (Sensor S1: SS (Sensor
Sensor Control Switch to PRESS (BACKSPACE). Control) Switch Selection) Switch T5: TDC (Target Designator
9. Set Targeting Pod page as a SOI (Sensor of Interest) by
setting the S1 Sensor Selection Switch in the direction Controller) Switch
of the MFCD (Right if POD page is on the RIGHT
MFCD). An asterisk will indicate the SOI status.
10. Use T5 TDC Switch to slew the targeting pod reticle on
the target, then use T5 TDC Switch PRESS control to
attempt a Point Track.
11. To “dump” (undesignated) a target, set the S2 Sensor
Control Switch to PRESS (BACKSPACE).
TGP Line-of-Sight
TGP Point Track
TGP Slaved to Radar
8
Sensor of Interest (SOI) Asterisk 235

CM-802AKG TV-GUIDED MISSILE
4.1 – DISPLAYS
THUNDER
The CM-802 AKG missile is a derivative of C-802AK, with over 150 km of low-profile range and Man-in-
the-loop (MITL) control. It is far more flexible than the C-701 since it can follow advanced
JF-17
programmable flight profiles.
Basically, the missile can be launched, follow a pre-planned trajectory and require the missile to be
manually remote-controlled by the pilot once it is close enough to the target.
The CM-802AKG missile requires a datalink pod to be installed to ensure communication between the
pilot and the missile.
CM-802AKG Missile
Datalink Pod
236
CM-802AKG TV-GUIDED MISSILE
4.2 – CONTROLS
THUNDER
The controls will be further detailed in the Weapons section.

JF-17
In short, the S1 Sensor Selection allows you to select the POD MIL
(Man-In-The-Loop) Page as the Sensor of Interest (SOI).
The Master Mode Switch must be set to AG (Air-to-Ground). POD Page

MIL (Man-In-The-Loop)
The POD MIL page allows you to set sensor TV options and watch Sub-Menu
missile seeker feed.
The SMS (Stores Management System) page allows you to set missile
parameters and power up the missile.
The T5 TDC (Target Designator Controller) allows you to control the

missile remotely once it is in range. SMS Page


POD MIL Page 237
C-701 TV-GUIDED MISSILE
5.1 – DISPLAYS
THUNDER
The C-701 is an Infrared TV-Guided missile similar to the AGM-65 Maverick.

JF-17
You can slave its seeker to other sensors or use SNOWPLOW mode to search a target. C-701
doesn’t have ranging capability, but when you can lock on target using its seeker (about 10
nm), you will most likely be in range.
C-701 is type of launch and forget missile.

C-701 Missile
238
C-701 TV-GUIDED MISSILE • UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
5.2 – CONTROLS • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
The controls will be further detailed in the Weapons section.

JF-17
In short, the S1 Sensor Selection allows you to select the POD TVIR
Page as the Sensor of Interest (SOI).
The Master Mode Switch must be set to AG (Air-to-Ground).
The POD TVIR page allows you to set sensor TV options and watch
missile seeker feed.
The SMS (Stores Management System) page allows you to set missile T5: TDC (Target Designator
parameters and power up the missile. Controller) Switch
The T5 TDC (Target Designator Controller) allows you to control POD TVIR Page
sensors and lock a target. Once a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) is
designated, the missile is slaved to this SPI and ready to be launched.
POD Page
TVIR Sub-Menu
S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch 239

SMS Page
6 - INTEGRATED SENSORS OPERATION
Here is an example of how sensors can interact with each other; using the air-to-ground radar and the targeting pod.
THUNDER
1. Using the air-to-ground radar, you can set the radar page as a SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the S1 Sensor Selection switch. Then, you can slew the TDC
cursor on an area and use the T5 TDC PRESS (ENTER) button to set a point as a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest).
2. Setting the targeting pod as the SOI with the S1 Sensor Selection switch, you can then slave the targeting pod on the SPI designated by the air-to-
JF-17
ground radar by pressing the OSB next to SLAV/SP.

3. Pressing the T5 TDC PRESS (ENTER) button will then set the targeting pod reticle as the SPI. The targeting pod will then showcase ranging information.
4. The HUD will then overlap the Targeting Pod Reticle Circle and the SPI diamond.
240
6 - INTEGRATED SENSORS OPERATION
Here is another example of how sensors can interact with each other; using the air-to-air radar and the targeting pod this time.
THUNDER
1. Using the air-to-air radar, you can set the radar page as a SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the S1 Sensor Selection switch. Then, you can
slew the TDC cursor on a target and use the T5 TDC PRESS (ENTER) button twice to lock the target in STT (Single Target Track) mode.
2. Setting the targeting pod as the SOI with the S1 Sensor Selection switch, you can then slave the targeting pod on the SPI designated by
JF-17
the air-to-air radar by pressing the OSB next to SLAV/SP.

3. Pressing the T5 TDC PRESS (ENTER) button will then set the targeting pod reticle as the SPI. The targeting pod will then display ranging
information and allow you to visually identify the radar contact.
4. The HUD will then overlap the Targeting Pod Reticle Circle and the radar lock square.
241
JF-17
PART 12 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT THUNDER
242
SECTION STRUCTURE
• 1 - Introduction
• 2 – Air-to-Ground Weapons
THUNDER
• 1.1 – Introduction to Weapons

• 2.8 – Anti-Radiation Missile
• 1.2 – Armament Overview
• 2.8.1 – LD-10 Anti-Radiation Missile (ACT)
•
JF-17
1.3 – Weapons Control Setup

• 2.8.2 – LD-10 Anti-Radiation Missile (PAS)
• 1.4 – DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) & Re-Arming
• 2.8.3 – LD-10 Anti-Radiation Missile (SP)
• 1.5 – SMS (Stores Management System) Page
• 2.9 – C-802AK Anti-Ship Missile
• 1.6 – Weapon Restrictions
• 2.9.1 – C-802AK Anti-Ship Missile (DIR)
• 1.7 – Bomb Delivery Modes
• 2.9.2 – C-802AK Anti-Ship Missile (COO)
PART 12 – OFFENCE: WEAPONS & ARMAMENT
• 2.9.3 – C-802AK Anti-Ship Missile (LOS)

• 2 – Air-to-Ground Weapons
• 2.1 – Unguided Bomb
• 3 – Air-to-Air Weapons
• 2.1.1 – MK-82 Bomb (CCIP)
• 3.1 – PL-5EII Infrared Homing Missile
• 2.1.2 – MK-82 Bomb (CCRP/AUTO)
• 3.2 – SD-10 Active Radar Homing Missile
• 2.1.3 – Type 200A Anti-Runway Bombs (AG Radar + CCRP/AUTO)
• 3.2.1 – SD-10 (Radar Lock)
• 2.2 – Unguided Rockets (CCIP)
• 3.2.2 – SD-10 (Mad Dog Mode)
• 2.3 – GSh-23-2 Cannon (Air-to-Ground)
• 3.2.3 – SD-10 (HOJ Mode)
• 2.4 – BRM-1 Laser-Guided Rockets (Targeting Pod)
• 3.3 – GSh-23-2 Cannon (Air-to-Air)
• 2.5 – GBU-12 Laser Guided Bombs (Targeting Pod)
• 3.3.1 – Cannon (SS Mode)
• 2.6 – Precision-Guided Munitions
• 3.3.2 – Cannon (LCOS Mode)
• 2.6.1 – LS-6 PGM Glide Bomb (TOO)
• 3.3.3 – Cannon (SSLC Mode)
• 2.6.2 – GB-6 PGM Glide Bomb (PP)
• 2.7 – TV-Guided Weapons
• 2.7.1 – C-701T TV-Guided Missile • 4 – Selective Ordnance Jettison
• 2.7.1.1 – C-701T – SNOWPLOW
• 2.7.1.2 – C-701T – SLAVED, Targeting Pod
• 2.7.1.3 – C-701T – SLAVED, AG Radar
• 2.7.2 – CM-802AKG TV-Guided Missile
• 2.7.2.1 – Initial Setup
• 2.7.2.2 – CM-802AKG – DIR (Direct) Release
• 2.7.2.3 – CM-802AKG – COO (Coordinates) Release
• 2.7.2.4 – CM-802AKG – MAN (Manual) Release
• 2.7.2.5 – Man-In-The-Loop (MITL) Guidance
243
1.1 – INTRODUCTION TO WEAPONS
The JF-17 carries a variety of weapons. Unguided weapons like dumb bombs and rockets have limited value in this aircraft since the Thunder is optimized to use its sensors to guide weapons
THUNDER
like the C-802AK anti-ship missile, GB-6 Precision-Guided Munition, CM-802AKG remote-controlled missile and BRM-1 laser-guided rockets. An impressive arsenal of ordnance is available to
use, and the way sensors are used to designate SPIs (Sensor Point of Interest) on targets is only limited by the creativity of the pilot. Take note that while a cannon is installed on the JF-17,
JF-17
it is not very precise and best used if everything else failed and your virtual life is on the line.
244
THUNDER
1.2 – ARMAMENT OVERVIEW
BOMBS
JF-17
WEAPON TYPE WEAPON TYPE

MK-82 500 lbs low-drag unguided bomb MK-20 Rockeye Unguided cluster bomb
Fuze Needed: NOSE Fuze Needed: NOSE
MK-82SE 500 lbs unguided low-drag retarded bomb LS-6 Global Positioning System (GPS)-guided glide bomb (lighter than GB-6)
(Snake Eye) Fuze Needed: NOSE JDAM PGM (Precision Guided Munition) / Joint Direct Attack Munition (JDAM)
MK-83 1000 lbs low-drag unguided bomb GB-6 Global Positioning System (GPS)-guided glide bomb (heavier than LS-6)
Fuze Needed: NOSE JSOW PGM (Precision Guided Munition) / Joint Standoff Weapon (JSOW)
MK-84 2000 lbs low-drag unguided bomb GBU-10/12/16 2000/500/1000 lbs laser-guided bomb
Fuze Needed: NOSE PAVEWAY II
Type 200A 450 lbs (200 kg) very-high-drag anti-runway bomb
Fuze Needed: NOSE + TAIL
GUN POD AIR-TO-AIR MISSILES ROCKETS

WEAPON TYPE WEAPON TYPE WEAPON TYPE
GSh-23-2 Twin-barreled PL-5EII Infrared guided air-to-air missile, BRM-1 90 mm (3.5 inches) laser-guided rockets. Cannot
Cannon 23 mm autocannon (180 similar to AIM-9 Sidewinder (16 per pod) be equipped on inner pylons in order to avoid
rounds) rocket smoke ingestion through the engine intake.
SD-10 Active radar homing air-to-air
missile, similar to AIM-120B 2.75 in 2.75 inches rocket, used for general purpose
AMRAAM (7 per pod)
245
1.2 – ARMAMENT OVERVIEW
AIR-TO-GROUND MISSILES
THUNDER
WEAPON TYPE
JF-17
C-701– IR Seeker (TV-Guided) Air-to-Ground missile guided by imaging infrared system and used at night and during bad weather. Similar to the AGM-65
Maverick.
CM-802AKG (TV-Guided) Air-to-Ground missile derivative of C-802AK, with over 150 km of low-profile range and man in the loop (MITL) control, which is
similar to the C-701 but far more flexible. It is basically a cruise missile that can be remote-controlled from the aircraft with a
datalink pod.
LD-10 ARM (Anti-Radiation Missile) Air-to-Surface Anti-Radiation Missile (ARM). Anti-radiation guidance homes in on radiowave emissions from a radar, allowing it to
attack surface-to-air missile (SAM) sites.
C-802AK ASM (Anti-Ship Missile) All-weather, over-the-horizon, Anti-Ship cruise missile system.
246
1.3 – WEAPONS CONTROL SETUP
MY SETUP
THUNDER
JF-17
S5 – Change Weapon Station/NWS

(Grey button on RHS) S2 (Sensor Control) UP
S2 (Sensor Control) LEFT
T6 Axis: Antenna Elevation

S3: Weapon Launch
Weapon Release T5 (TDC) Press (ENTER)

S4: Trigger:
Gun Fire Main Gun
Second
Detent
COMM Switch: COMM 1
T2 PRESS
S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. FWD
COMM Switch: COMM 2
S1S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. RIGHT TDC SLEW VERTICAL
S1S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. AFT TDC SLEW HORIZONTAL
S1S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. LEFT TDC SLEW VERTICAL
TDC SLEW HORIZONTAL
SPEED BRAKE RETRACT
S8 – Change Weapons SPEED BRAKE EXTEND T1 BACK (MMS AG)

T1 CENTER (MMS NAV)
T1 FWD (MMS INTC)
Autopilot / Nosewheel
Steering Disengage (Paddle) ATC Engage/Disengage
Throttle Finger Lift (BOTH)
247
1.3 – WEAPONS CONTROL SETUP
REAL SETUP
THUNDER

JF-17

S4: Gun Trigger


S8: Missile Type Selection Button
S3: Weapon Launch/Release Button
S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
248
SMS Page in incorrect state (DTC needs to be updated,
1.4 – DTC & RE-ARMING then loaded into the aircraft)
If you ever want to re-arm or change your weapon loadout on the

THUNDER
ground, the procedure to contact the ground crew is as follows:

• Contact ground crew and select your desired loadout by
JF-17
pressing « \ », then pressing F8 (Ground Crew), and F1 (Rearm

& Refuel).
However, the Stores Management System (SMS) page may

appear empty or incorrect once the re-arming process is
complete. Why? Because the DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge)

needs to be updated by the ground crew, then inserted in the
aircraft, then loaded into the SMS page itself.
SMS Page in correct state (DTC has been updated,

then loaded into the aircraft)
249
1.4 – DTC & RE-ARMING
To update the Stores Management System page after a re-arming:
THUNDER
1. Make sure DC Power is available (engine is started and DC GEN switch is ON) and
JF-17
DTC card is unmounted.

2. Open canopy, then contact ground crew and request a DTC Data Update by 2
pressing:
a) « \ »
b) F8 (Ground Crew)
c) F5 (Update DTC Data)

d) F1 (Update Data).
3. Once DTC is updated, click twice on the DTC slot to insert the cartridge.
3a Click a second
time to insert DTC 3b DTC Inserted
250
1.4 – DTC & RE-ARMING
5a
4. Once DTC is inserted, left MFCD will automatically 5b
THUNDER
display to the DATA – DTC Sub-page with the

« DTC LOCKED » message.
JF-17
5. Select menus to be updated with the new DTC:

a) If you have changed your navigation 4
program, countermeasure program or
other elements applicable to the DTC
menus, you should probably not take any
chances and press OSB (Option Select

Button) next to « ALL » to select all data
fields to be updated (boxed when
selected).
b) If you have just updated your weapons
and nothing else, you can select the SMS 6
menu only to avoid wasting time to reload
every other data field.
6. Press OSB (Option Select Button) next to « ENT »
(Enter) to transfer data.
7. « DTC TRANS » message will indicate information
transfer is in progress.
8. « DTC LOCKED » message and unboxed data fields
will indicate that the information transfer is
complete.
7 8
251
1.5 – SMS (STORES MANAGEMENT SYSTEM) PAGE
The SMS (Stores Management System) page can be accessed by clicking on the Main MENU OSB , then selecting the SMS sub-menu.
THUNDER
This page acts like the A-10C’s DSMS (Data & Stores Management Systems) page and allows you to select armament and program useful options like gun
JF-17
firing speed, bomb delivery mode or advanced air-to-ground missile modes. The content of the SMS page needs to be loaded from the DTC (Data
Transfer Cartridge), which is programmed by the ground crew once your ordnance is loaded on the aircraft. See the previous section for more details. SMS Page Selectors
The wingform display provides the number, type, and status of all stores loaded on the aircraft’s weapon stations. A square on the weapon symbol
indicates that a station is selected. Various indications can be displayed below the number of weapons numeric to indicate weapon status such as ARM,
RDY, FAL (Failure), OFF, or STBY. The gun rounds remaining is indicated at the top of the wingform (180 being a full load and 0 when empty).
Main MENU OSB
PL-5EII Missile
BRM-1
Rocket Pod
GB-6 PGM
(JSOW)
PL-5EII Missile GSh-23-2 Cannon
WMD-7 Targeting Pod
CM-802AKG Missile
252
GBU-12 Guided Bomb
1.6 – WEAPON RESTRICTIONS
When flying the JF-17 is heavy load configurations, you must be careful not to exceed the structural limits of the
THUNDER
ordnance you are carrying.

Current G Loading
JF-17
Air-to-Air missiles and pods do not have structural G restrictions, but heavy Air-to-Ground weapon pylons like the
GB-6 or C-802AK can be jammed or damaged during high G manoeuvers. When the pylon is damaged, launching or
jettisoning the payload may not be possible. The C-701 missile itself can also be damaged by high Gs.
Try to avoid pulling more than 4-5 Gs when flying with heavy payloads.
Maximum G
Loading Recorded
253
1.7 – BOMB DELIVERY MODES
CCIP & CCRP
THUNDER
There are 2 ways to deliver a bomb: CCRP or CCIP modes.

JF-17
CCIP mode is the traditional dive bombing approach: you dive on target
and the reticle will tell you where the bomb will impact.
However, dive bombing is a risky business, especially if anti-air defences

are surrounding your target. The lower you go, the more vulnerable you
are. This is why CCRP release mode was invented.
CCRP mode allows you to fly straight and level without having to dive
down. The HUD will tell you when to release your bomb for the target you
have designated with your radar. It is a much safer way to release a bomb, CCIP: Continuously Computed Impact Point
but as you may have guessed already, it is less precise. CCRP mode is also
referred to the AUTO mode.
CCRP: Continuously Computed Release Point
254
2.1.1 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82 (CCIP) T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch) 2
UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP) MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation)
THUNDER
2. Set Master Mode Switch – A/G (DOWN) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)

3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page. A/S1 represents the Air-to-Ground Weapon
JF-17
Profile No. 1, which we will modify.
3
255
2.1.1 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82 (CCIP)
4. Select MK-82 bombs by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then select 82L.
THUNDER
5. Select CCIP weapon release mode by pressing the OSB next to MODE, then
select CCIP. 7b
JF-17
6. Select fuzing by pressing the OSB next to FUZE, then select NOSE.
7. Select quantity by pressing the OSB next to QTY, then select desired quantity
(i.e. 1).
8. If applicable, select bomb release interval by pressing the OSB next to INTERVAL, 4b
then enter distance between bomb in ft (no interval since single bomb is
selected).
9. Select BR ALT (Break Off Altitude) by pressing the OSB next to BR ALT, then enter
desired altitude in ft (i.e. 0500 = 500 ft). This will set the altitude setting of the
Pull-Up Cue X on the HUD.
5b
8b
5a 7a
6b
4a 8a
6a 9a
9b
256
10. Start a 30-45 degree dive on your target
THUNDER
11. Align target vertically with DIL (Displayed Impact Line), also known as Bomb
Fall Line. The DIL will be dashed when no bombing solution is computed yet.
JF-17
12. The CCIP cross will appear once a bombing solution is computed; the DIL
will become full.
13. Steer aircraft to keep the DIL vertical and the CCIP cross on the target.
14. Press and hold the Weapon Release button (« RALT+SPACE ») once CCIP
cross is on target. Hold button until all programmed bombs are released.
14
Flight Path Marker FULL DIL (Displayed Impact Line)
DASHED DIL
11 (Displayed Impact Line) CCIP Cross
(On Target) 13
Weapon Status, Master Mode,

257
and Weapon Mode Information
JF-17
258
2.1.2 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82 (CCRP/AUTO) UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
2
MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation)
DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP)
THUNDER
2. Set Master Mode Switch – A/G (DOWN)

JF-17
3
259
2.1.2 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82 (CCRP/AUTO)
THUNDER
5. Select CCRP/AUTO weapon release mode by pressing the OSB next to MODE,
then select AUTO. 7b
JF-17
6. Select fuzing by pressing the OSB next to FUZE, then select NOSE.
7. Select quantity by pressing the OSB next to QTY, then select desired quantity
(i.e. 4).
8. If applicable, select bomb release interval by pressing the OSB next to 4b
INTERVAL, then enter distance between bomb in ft (050 = 50 ft).
9. Select BR ALT (Break Off Altitude) by pressing the OSB next to BR ALT, then
enter desired altitude in ft (i.e. 0500 = 500 ft). This will set the altitude setting
of the Pull-Up Cue X on the HUD.
5b 8b
5a 7a 6b
4a 8a
6a 9a
9b
260
2.1.2 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82 (CCRP/AUTO)
10. Visually identify your target, and set it as the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
THUNDER
with your desired sensor.

a) To designate a target with the HUD, toggle the S1 Sensor Selection
JF-17
Switch AFT to toggle the HUD as the SOI (Sensor of Interest), which
will be marked by an asterisk.
10b
b) Steer the aircraft to place the designation diamond over the target,
then designate target as the SPI by using the T5-TDC PRESS button T5: TDC (Target Designator
(ENTER). Controller) Switch
• Alternatively, you could also designate the SPI using the targeting
pod or with the air-to-ground radar. 10a

11. The CCRP bar attached to Flight Path Marker indicates CCRP solution.
• The deflection of bar means commanded bank to help aircraft align
with the target (max deflection is left/right 60 degrees)
Weapon Status, Master Mode, 11 CCRP Bar

Targeting Pod Slaved to SPI
Designation Diamond
Air-to-Ground Radar 10b

Designating SPI
SOI Asterisk 10a
SOI Asterisk
SOI Asterisk 261
Flight Path Marker
14
2.1.2 – UNGUIDED BOMB – MK-82 (CCRP/AUTO) Vertical Speed
CCRP Solution Cue Bar
(x100 ft/min) 13
12. Fly level and keep your flight path marker aligned with the BFL (Bomb Fall
THUNDER
Line).
13. Pay special attention to the vertical speed: the aircraft should NOT be
JF-17
descending (bomb release will be inhibited to avoid flying into your own BFL (Bomb Fall Line)
bombs) and should NOT be ascending (this will throw off your aim). Fly level
(vertical speed = 0). 12
14. The CCRP Solution Cue Bar is used as a release cue Range to Target (nm)
• If there is no CCRP solution, the bar is a completely dashed line
• If there is a CCRP solution but greater than 15 sec, only 1/4 from
the top is solid but the remaining part of the bar remains dashed
15. When CCRP solution cue is reducing from 4 sec to 0 sec, the bar starts to
change to solid line on the 3/4 part. 16
16. When Time to Target is about 3 sec, hold the S3 Weapon Release Button S3: Weapon Launch/Release Button
(« RALT+SPACE »). An aural cue is audible 3 seconds away from the bomb
release point Time to Target (sec)
17. When CCRP bar is full, bombs will release automatically as long as you hold SPI Diamond
the Weapon Release button. (Target Designator)
SPI Arrow (actual SPI

is below the HUD)
17
17
CCRP Bar Full
262
2.1.3 – ANTI-RUNWAY BOMBS – TYPE 200A UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
2
(AG Radar + CCRP/AUTO) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
Basically, the Type 200As are unguided, high-drag, rocket assisted anti-runway bombs. They are delivered just like Snake Eyes and
can use either CCIP or CCRP (Auto) release mode. The Type 200As are used against hard/reinforced targets like runways. The
JF-17
forward half of the bomb holds the explosives, the penetrator and the fuse. The aft half contains the booster, the stabilizing fins
and the deployable chute.

3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page. A/S1 represents the Air-to-Ground Weapon Profile No. 1, which we will modify.
263
2.1.3 – ANTI-RUNWAY BOMBS – TYPE 200A
(AG Radar + CCRP/AUTO) 7b
THUNDER
4. Select Type 200A Anti-Runway bombs by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then
select « 200 ».
JF-17
then select AUTO.
6. Select fuzing by pressing the OSB next to FUZE, then select N+T (Nose + Tail).
7. Select quantity by pressing the OSB next to QTY, then select desired quantity (i.e. 4b
4).
8. If applicable, select bomb release interval by pressing the OSB next to INTERVAL,
then enter distance between bomb in ft (700 = 700 ft).
5b 8b
6b
5a
7a
4a 8a
6a 9a
9b
264
(AG Radar + CCRP/AUTO)
THUNDER

10. By default, radar MAP mode should already be selected.
JF-17
12. If another Air-to-Ground Radar mode was selected, press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option
Select Button) to enter the Air-to-Ground Radar Mode selection menu and press on the OSB next
15a 17a
to “MAP” to select Ground Mapping Mode. S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch
13. Make sure Snowplow Mode is selected (OSB next to SP/SLV toggles Snowplow and Slave Modes). T5: TDC (Target Designator
14. Adjust Gain and Contrast– As required. 10a
Controller) Switch
15. Slew the TDC Cursor (Radar Crosshair) over the region you want to expand/designate using the T5
TDC Switch.
16. If you want to use Expanded sub-modes, either press the S2/SC (Sensor Control) Switch LEFT or use
the OSB next to the Radar Sub-Mode Selector to switch to desired Sub-Mode.
17. To designate a target/SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) on the Radar Crosshair position, use the T5 TDC 12
PRESS switch control (ENTER). This will set the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) at this location and
center the radar image around this SPI. We will designate the right runway as seen on the radar
ground mapping display expanded in DBS2 sub-mode. 11
17a 17b
SPI Not Designated SPI Designated
13
15b
Radar Crosshair
16b
14
265
THUNDER
19. If desired, you can slave other sensors like the Targeting Pod to the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
designated via the radar. To do so, uncage the targeting pod and set the SP/SLAV (Snowplow/Slave)
JF-17
Function to SLAV. The targeting pod will then be slaved to the designated SPI and give you a better
view of the point designated by the radar.
19b
19a
266
Flight Path Marker
2.1.3 – ANTI-RUNWAY BOMBS – TYPE 200A Vertical Speed
(AG Radar + CCRP/AUTO) (x100 ft/min)
22 CCRP Solution Cue Bar
THUNDER
21
20. Fly level at least 1000 ft above the target and keep your flight path marker
aligned with the BFL (Bomb Fall Line).
JF-17
21. Pay special attention to the vertical speed: the aircraft should NOT be 20 BFL (Bomb Fall Line)
descending (bomb release will be inhibited to avoid flying into your own
bombs) and should NOT be ascending (this will throw off your aim). Fly level Range to Target (nm)
(vertical speed = 0).
22. The CCRP Solution Cue Bar is used as a release cue

• If there is a CCRP solution but greater than 15 sec, only 1/4 from the
top is solid but the remaining part of the bar remains dashed
23. When CCRP solution cue is reducing from 4 sec to 0 sec, the bar starts to
change to solid line on the 3/4 part.
24. When Time to Target is about 3 sec, hold the S3 Weapon Release Button
(« RALT+SPACE »). An aural cue is audible 3 seconds away from the bomb
release point
25. When CCRP bar is full, bombs will release automatically as long as you hold the
Weapon Release button. Time to Target (sec)
SPI Diamond
(Target Designator)
25
SPI Arrow (actual SPI
is below the HUD)
S3: Weapon Launch/Release Button 24
25
CCRP Bar Full
267
THUNDER
26. Just after the bombs are released, the parachute is deployed, separating the
bomb from the aircraft and slowing it down. After a few seconds seconds and
JF-17
when the bomb is less than 40° from the vertical, the parachute is jettisoned and
the booster is fired, accelerating the bomb into the ground. After penetration is
achieved, the bomb explodes… creating a crater.
27. Pull up to avoid smacking yourself into the ground and watch the fireworks.
268
2.2 – UNGUIDED ROCKETS (CCIP) UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2
THUNDER

JF-17

3

269
2.2 – UNGUIDED ROCKETS (CCIP)
THUNDER
5. CCIP weapon release mode is selected by default and cannot be changed.

6. Select fuzing by pressing the OSB next to FUZE, then select EFUZE (Electronic
JF-17
Fuze).
7. Select quantity by pressing the OSB next to QTY, then select desired quantity 7b
(i.e. 4).
8. If applicable, select bomb release interval by pressing the OSB next to INTERVAL, 4b
then enter time between rockets in ms (500 = 0.5 s).
5 8b
7a
6b
4a 8a
6a 9a
9b
270
2.2 – UNGUIDED ROCKETS (CCIP)
THUNDER
11. Align CCIP circle/reticle on the target

12. Press and hold the Weapon Release button (« RALT+SPACE ») once CCIP
JF-17
circle is on target. Hold button until all programmed rockets are released.
12
11 S3: Weapon Launch/Release Button
CCIP Reticle
CCIP Cross
(On Target) 13

271
T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch) 6b
2.3 – GSH-23-2 CANNON (AIR-TO-GROUND) UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation) 2
THUNDER

3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page. A/S1 represents the Air-to-
JF-17
Ground Weapon Profile No. 1, which we will modify.

4. Select GSh-23 Gun by pressing the OSB next to GUN. The weapon profile will
automatically switch to the Air-to-Ground Gun Profile.
5. CCIP weapon release mode is selected by default and cannot be changed.
6. Select Gun Burst Time Limiter by pressing the OSB next to LIMITER, then
select desired burst duration (i.e. 0.5 sec).

7. Select BR ALT (Break Off Altitude) by pressing the OSB next to BR ALT, then 7b
enter desired altitude in ft (i.e. 0500 = 500 ft). This will set the altitude setting
of the Pull-Up Cue X on the HUD.
8. Click on the FEED OSB to reload the gun. A box indication on FEED will blink
for a few seconds, then disappear once the gun is loaded and ready to be
fired. The FEED function can be used if the gun jams, but it can only be used
up to three times. After a third attempt, the system won’t respond and FEED
will keep blinking.
8
Number of rounds
The cannon uses a “pyrotechnical” reload system, which
means that a cassette equipped with a pyrocartridge will
detonate a charge to “reload” the gun.
5
6a
4
1
7a
272
2.3 – GSH-23-2 CANNON (AIR-TO-GROUND)
THUNDER
11. Align gun reticle on the target

12. Press and hold the S4 Gun Trigger (« SPACE ») once gun reticle is on target.
JF-17
Gun Boresight Cross S4: Gun Trigger
Gun Reticle 12

273
2.4 – BRM-1 LASER-GUIDED ROCKETS
(TARGETING POD)
THUNDER
• The laser code on the laser-guided rockets needs to be set manually on the ground by the ground crew.
a) Contact ground crew and select your desired loadout by pressing « \ »
JF-17
b) Select Ground Crew menu

c) Select Update Laser Code menu
d) Select Choose Pylon menu and select the pylon BRM-1 rockets is installed on. You can select all of them using Change All menu.
e) Select desired Change Code Hundreds/Tens/Units menu to set desired code
f) Select Setting Complete menu to request the ground crew to change the laser code.
274
2.4 – BRM-1 LASER-GUIDED ROCKETS UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2
(TARGETING POD) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
Note: Make sure the the CLDP (Convertible Laser Designator Pod) button CLDP Button
is pressed to allow the targeting pod laser to be used.
JF-17
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP).

3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page. A/S1 represents the
Air-to-Ground Weapon Profile No. 1, which we will modify.
275
7b
(TARGETING POD)
THUNDER
4. Select BRM-1 rockets by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then select BRM.
5. DIR (Direct) weapon release mode is already set by default.
JF-17
6. Select fuzing by pressing the OSB next to FUZE, then select EFUZE (Electronic 4b
Fuze).
7. Select quantity by pressing the OSB next to QTY (i.e. 2).
8. The rocket release interval will automatically set by the QTY setting (SALVO for
QTY 2, SINGLE for QTY 1).
9. Select BR ALT (Break Off Altitude) by pressing the OSB next to BR ALT, then
5
enter desired altitude in ft (i.e. 0500 = 500 ft). This will set the altitude setting of
the Pull-Up Cue X on the HUD.
Rocket Laser Code 8

(set on ground)
7a
4a
6a 9a
6b
9b
276
(TARGETING POD)
THUNDER
10. Go in the MAIN MENU MFCD page and press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to POD. 11 12
JF-17

13. Targeting pod will enter a BIT (Built-In Test) mode that starts a warm-up process that will take
about 60 seconds.
14. When targeting pod is ready to be used, the pod ALIGN status will disappear and be replaced by
the pod feed in caged/stowed position.
16. Select desired mode (SP/SNOWPLOW or SLAV/SLAVED) by pressing the OSB next to SP/SLAV. In
this case, we will use SNOWPLOW (SP) mode.
17. Press the OSB next to CODE and set the desired laser code the targeting pod will designate with.
The default code is 1688, so make sure it matches the code of the laser-guided ordnance (set by
ground crew) that will track this laser. In this example, we will use a laser code of 1688.
18. Select either CCD (Charged-Coupled Device/TV) or IR as required. 15a
14
13
10b
18
15b 16
17
277
10a
(TARGETING POD)
THUNDER
in the direction of the MFCD (RIGHT if POD page is on the Right MFCD). An asterisk will
JF-17

slew controls. Use Radar Antenna Elevation Switch to zoom in or out.
• MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation) Reticle
22
20/21
T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch 19b
20 T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch

2.4 – BRM-1 LASER-GUIDED ROCKETS • UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
(TARGETING POD) • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
23. Select Laser Designation Mode as desired.

• MANUAL mode requires you to use the “Laser Designator ON/OFF” binding
JF-17
(RCTRL+O) to fire the laser and latch it, displaying a flashing LSD indication. This is
useful when “buddy lasing” a target for a friendly aircraft.
• AUTO mode will automatically fire the laser and latch it after you fire a laser-guided
rocket. This is much more efficient since it reduces your workload and avoids
overheating the laser designator.
• Note: If you want to undesignate a target, set the S2 Sensor Control Switch to PRESS
(BACKSPACE).
Coordinates
Range
24 Targeting Pod
Reticle (Circle)
SPI (Sensor Point
of Interest) Data
SPI (Sensor Point
of Interest)
Laser Firing
(Flashing)
Laser Code
(Flashing) 23
279
(TARGETING POD)
THUNDER
25. Steer the aircraft to roughly align the rocket aiming zone with
the targeting pod’s reticle.
JF-17
26. When the IN RANGE cue is visible, press the S3 Weapon

Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») to fire your rockets.
27. If using MAN lasing mode, use the « RCTRL+O » binding to
manually fire the laser on the target. If using AUTO lasing
mode, the laser will automatically fire once you have fired the
rockets. The rockets will track the laser and home on the
designated target.
26b

Targeting Pod
26a
Reticle (Circle)
IN RANGE Cue
280
2.5 – GBU-12 LASER-GUIDED BOMBS
(TARGETING POD)
THUNDER
• The laser code on the laser-guided bomb units needs to be set manually on the ground by the ground crew.
a) Contact ground crew and select your desired loadout by pressing « \ »
JF-17
b) Select Ground Crew menu

c) Select Update Laser Code menu
d) Select Choose Pylon menu and select the pylon GBU is installed on. You can select all of them using Change All menu.
e) Select desired Change Code Hundreds/Tens/Units menu to set desired code
f) Select Setting Complete menu to request the ground crew to change the laser code.
281
2.5 – GBU-12 LASER-GUIDED BOMBS UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2
(TARGETING POD) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
Note: Make sure the the CLDP (Convertible Laser Designator Pod) button is CLDP Button
pressed to allow the targeting pod laser to be used.
JF-17

3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page. A/S1 represents the Air-
to-Ground Weapon Profile No. 1, which we will modify.
282
(TARGETING POD)
THUNDER
4. Select GBU-12 bombs by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then select G12.
JF-17
7b
then select AUTO.
6. Select fuzing by pressing the OSB next to FUZE, then select NOSE. 4b
7. Select quantity by pressing the OSB next to QTY, then select desired quantity (i.e.
1).
8. If applicable, select bomb release interval by pressing the OSB next to INTERVAL,
then enter distance between bomb in ft. For single bombs, we’ll leave this to 0.
8b
5b
6b
7a
5a
4a 8a
6a 9a
Bomb Laser Code (set on ground)

9b
283
(TARGETING POD)
THUNDER
10. Go in the MAIN MENU MFCD page and press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to POD. 11 12
JF-17

about 60 seconds.
17. Press the OSB next to CODE and set the desired laser code the targeting pod will designate with.
The default code is 1688, so make sure it matches the code of the laser-guided ordnance (set by
ground crew) that will track this laser. In this example, we will use a laser code of 1688.
18. Select either CCD (Charged-Coupled Device/TV) or IR as required. 15a
14
13
10b
18
15b 16
17
284
10a
(TARGETING POD)
THUNDER
JF-17

T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch) Reticle

S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
22
20/21

19b
2.5 – GBU-12 LASER-GUIDED BOMBS • UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
(TARGETING POD) • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
23. Select Laser Designation Mode as desired.

• MANUAL mode requires you to use the “Laser Designator ON/OFF” binding
JF-17
(RCTRL+O) to fire the laser and latch it, displaying a flashing LSD indication. This is
useful when “buddy lasing” a target for a friendly aircraft.
• AUTO mode will automatically fire the laser and latch it after you launch a laser-
guided bomb. This is much more efficient since it reduces your workload and avoids
overheating the laser designator.
• Note: If you want to undesignate a target, set the S2 Sensor Control Switch to PRESS
(BACKSPACE).
Coordinates
Range T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch

24 SPI (Sensor Point

of Interest) Data
SPI (Sensor Point

of Interest)
CCRP Bar
Laser Firing
(Flashing)
Laser Code
(Flashing) 23 Targeting Pod
Reticle (Circle)
286
2.5 – GBU-12 LASER-GUIDED BOMBS Flight Path Marker
28 CCRP Solution
(TARGETING POD) Cue Bar Vertical Speed
27
THUNDER
(x100 ft/min)
25. The CCRP bar attached to Flight Path Marker indicates CCRP solution.
• The deflection of bar means commanded bank to help aircraft align with the target (max
JF-17
deflection is left/right 60 degrees) BFL (Bomb Fall Line)

26. Fly level and keep your flight path marker aligned with the BFL (Bomb Fall Line).
27. Pay special attention to the vertical speed: the aircraft should NOT be descending (bomb release will 26 Range to Target (nm)
be inhibited to avoid flying into your own bombs) and should NOT be ascending (this will throw off
your aim). Fly level (vertical speed = 0).
28. The CCRP Solution Cue Bar is used as a release cue

• If there is a CCRP solution but greater than 15 sec, only 1/4 from the top is solid but the
remaining part of the bar remains dashed
29. When CCRP solution cue is reducing from 4 sec to 0 sec, the bar starts to change to solid line on the
3/4 part.
30. When Time to Target is about 3 sec, an aural cue is audible 3 seconds away from the bomb release
point
Time to Target (sec)
31. When CCRP bar is full and Time to Target is at 0 sec, hold the S3 Weapon Release Button
(« RALT+SPACE »). SPI Arrow (actual SPI
is below the HUD)
31c
CCRP Release Cue
25
Time to Impact (s)

31a
CCRP Bar Full
31b
287
(TARGETING POD)
THUNDER
32. If using MAN lasing mode, use the « RCTRL+O » binding to manually fire the laser
on the target. If using AUTO lasing mode, the laser will automatically fire once you
JF-17
have dropped the bomb. The guided bomb unit will track the laser and home on
the designated target.
288
2.6 – PRECISION-GUIDED MUNITIONS (PGM)
The JF-17 is able to employ the Global Positioning System (GPS)-guided LS-6 and GB-6
THUNDER
precision-guided munitions (PGM). The LS-6 is very similar to the F-16’s Joint Direct Attack
Munition (JDAM) bombs and the GB-6 is also very similar to the Joint Standoff Weapon
JF-17
(JSOW) glide bombs. JDAMs are modified general purpose bombs, equipped with a GPS and
inertial navigation system (INS) for guidance as well as flight controls. The JSOW has the same Coordinate Format:
guidance and is a bomb with wings to provide lift and maneuvering flight controls. As such, it DD MM SS.SS
has a significantly longer range than JDAMs. Degrees Minutes Seconds.Decimal-Seconds
Basically, the way to employ JDAMs is to first get your target coordinates from either the Use LALT+Y to toggle between coordinate units
mission briefing or using the F10 map, input them to the weapons in either Pre-Planned
Mode (coordinates need to be entered manually) or in TOO Mode (Target of Opportunity,
weapons use the existing designated SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) from the targeting pod,
ground radar or waypoint designation.
For the LS-6 JDAM tutorial, we will use the TOO Mode while for the GB-6 JSOW tutorial we
will use Pre-Planned (PP) Mode. Once the setup is done and the weapon alignment has been
performed, we will then be able to release them in Manual Mode.
Set Up Weapon
(Pre-Planned coordinates)
OR
Find Target Coordinates Set Up Weapon

(F10 Map, Mission Editor Release PGM
(TOO, Waypoint Designate)
Waypoints, JTAC, etc.)
OR
Mission Briefing Target Points
(Pre-Planned Setup, already set up in
Set Up Weapon Mission Editor) 289
(TOO, Targeting Pod Designate)
2.6.1 – LS-6 PGM GLIDE BOMB UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2
(TOO, Target-of-Opportunity) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
Set Up Weapons
JF-17
1. Master Arm switch – ARM (UP) 1

3. While in the air, go in SMS (Stores Management System) page. A/S1
represents the Air-to-Ground Weapon Profile No. 1, which we will modify.
4. Select LS-6 glide bombs by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then select LS6.
5. Set Fuze (Direct/Delay), Quantity and Interval (ft) as required.

6. Once selected, the LS-6 needs about 3 minutes for alignment. When
alignment is complete, the ALN Timing indicator will go to 00:00. This timer
is visible on the right display
5
4
6
290
2.6.1 – LS-6 PGM GLIDE BOMB
(TOO, Target-of-Opportunity)
THUNDER
Set Up Weapons
JF-17
7. Select the CNTL (Control) menu.

8. Select TOO weapon release mode by pressing the OSB next to MODE, then select TOO.
9. Set Option as desired. We will leave this field to SNGL (Single).
10. If desired, set Impact Azimuth (Direction the LS-6 will take to attack the target) as required. We will leave it to OFF, meaning that the LS-6 will head straight for the target after launch.
11. If using an Offset Aiming Point, set OAP option to ON. We will leave this to OFF.
12. Set Impact Angle as desired. -45 deg is a good angle, so we will leave it as is.
7b
7a
8 11
12
10
291
THUNDER
14 15
Set Up Targeting Pod
JF-17
13. Go in the MAIN MENU MFCD page and press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to POD.
about 60 seconds.
20. Select either CCD (Charged-Coupled Device/TV) or IR as required.
18a
17
13b 16
20
18b 19
13a
292
THUNDER

JF-17
Reticle

24
22/23
22 T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch 21b

THUNDER

JF-17
25. Confirm that SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) coordinates set by the targeting pod
match the coordinates on the WPN LS6 page.
25
294
THUNDER
Launch Weapon
JF-17
26. I suggest you remove the moving map from the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) if
possible since this page is what we will use to determine our range to the target.
27. Fly the aircraft into the Maximum Acceptable Release Zone. The zone line is dashed
when the aircraft is out of range, and full when the aircraft is within range.
28. When within the acceptable launch zone, press the S3 Weapon Release Button
(« RALT+SPACE »). The GB-6 will glide by itself automatically to the Pre-Planned Point
PP1.
28
TGT1 (Target 1)
SPI Diamond Minimum Launch Range
Acceptable
Release Zone
(In Range)
Maximum Launch Range
(White Bar)
Acceptable
Release Zone
(Out of Range)
26 Aircraft
Aircraft
295
JF-17
296
2.6.2 – GB-6 PGM GLIDE BOMB
(PP, Pre-Planned)
THUNDER
Find Coordinates
JF-17
1. Find coordinates of target in Degrees Minutes Seconds:Decimal-Seconds. Do not forget target elevation. You can use
the F10 map or a targeting pod.
• Each Pre-Planned point will need to have its coordinates stored in one of the four available DEST waypoints (Waypoints
36 to 39 are reserved for that purpose).
• You can use coordinates directly from the PP, or can also use an OAP (Offset Aiming Point), which takes the coordinates
of a PP and offsets it by a bearing, range (ft) and altitude (ft). In our case, we will just use the Pre-Planned Point PP1.
Pre-Planned Point (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)

Target Point DEST Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft) Alternate Target
OAP: Offset Aiming Point
TGT1/ PP1 36 42 14 27.3 N 042 03 06.2 E 00043
004 deg from PP1
3000 ft from PP1
DEST Waypoint Database 10 ft higher than PP1
00 Aircraft position for INS alignment

01 to 29 Waypoints reserved for navigation
30 to 35 Waypoints reserved for CM-802AKG and C-
(RP1 to RP6) 802AK missile steerpoints (Route Points)
36 to 39 Waypoints reserved for LS-6/GB-6 bomb
(PP1 to PP4) targets (Pre-Planned Points)
40 SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Coordinates
41 to 49 Reserved for Markpoints
50 to 58 Reserved waypoints for airfields closest to
last navigation waypoint (non-editable)
TGT1 (Target 1) 297
59 Reserved waypoint for airfield (editable) PP1
2.6.2 – GB-6 PGM GLIDE BOMB 2b
(PP, Pre-Planned)
THUNDER
Enter Coordinates
JF-17
2. We then need to enter coordinates on DST Waypoint 36 for PP1. There are many
ways to do it. You can either:
a) Press DST button on the UFCP, select Waypoint 36, enter manually the
Latitude, Longitude and Elevation coordinates on the UFCP as shown in the
Navigation section.
b) Or… Add a Marker on the target via the F10 map and name it “PP1”. Then,
ask the ground crew to update the DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge), then load
the DTC into the aircraft as seen during the start-up procedure. This will
automatically create Waypoint 36 (PP1) for you without having to enter
TGT1 (Target 1)
coordinates manually. PP1
c) Or… Just load the DTC into the aircraft if the Mission Creator was kind
enough to create a NAVIGATION TARGET POINT called “PP1” on the target.
Pre-Planned Point (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)

Target Point DEST Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)
TGT1/ PP1 36 42 14 27.3 N 042 03 06.2 E 00043 2c
2a
TGT1 (Target 1)
PP1
298
2.6.2 – GB-6 PGM GLIDE BOMB UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 4
(PP, Pre-Planned) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
Set Up Weapons
JF-17

6. Select GB-6 glide bombs by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then select
GB6.
7. Once selected, the GB-6 needs about 3 minutes for alignment. When
alignment is complete, the ALN Timing indicator will go to 00:00 on the
right display.
299
(PP, Pre-Planned)
THUNDER
8a
Set Up Weapons
JF-17

9. Select PP weapon release mode by pressing the OSB next to MODE, then select PP. 9b
10. Select DEST Waypoint (Channel 36 for PP1) as desired.
11. Set Impact Azimuth (Direction the GB-6 will take to attack the target) as required (we will use 225).
12. If using an Offset Aiming Point, set OAP option to ON. We will leave this to OFF.
13. Set Height of Burst in the OPEN option (050 is 50 ft). 10a
14. Press the OSB next to CNTL to return to the Weapons Program page. 12a
11a
8b
13a
14
9a
12b
10b
11b 13b
300
(PP, Pre-Planned)
THUNDER
Set Up Weapons
JF-17
15. Select fuzing by pressing the OSB next to FUZE, then select DIRECT or DELAY as desired. 20
16. Select quantity by pressing the OSB next to QTY, then select desired quantity (i.e. 1).
17. If applicable, select bomb release interval by pressing the OSB next to INTERVAL, then enter distance between
bomb in ft. For single bombs, we’ll leave this to 0.
18. Since we will launch our ordnance from a high altitude, there is no real need to set the BR ALT (Break Off Altitude).
19. On the HUD, verify that Weapon Status (WPN RDY), Master Mode (AG) and Weapon Mode (PP) are selected
properly.
20. Confirm that SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) coordinates on the WPN GB6 page match the coordinates for the target
set previously for Waypoint 36.
16
19
17
18
15 301
(PP, Pre-Planned)
THUNDER
Launch Weapons
JF-17
21. I suggest you remove the moving map from the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display) if possible since
this page is what we will use to determine our range to the target.
22. Fly the aircraft into the Maximum Acceptable Release Zone. The zone is dashed when the aircraft is
out of range, and full when the aircraft is within range.
23. When within the acceptable launch zone, press the S3 Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE »).
The GB-6 will glide by itself automatically to the Pre-Planned Point PP1.
TGT1 (Target 1)
PP1
TGT1 (Target 1)
PP1
Minimum Launch Range
Acceptable
Release Zone
(In Range)
Maximum Launch Range
23
Acceptable
Release Zone S3: Weapon Launch/Release Button
(Out of Range)
21 Aircraft
Aircraft
302
JF-17
(PP, Pre-Planned)
303
JF-17
(PP, Pre-Planned)
304
2.7.1 – C-701T TV-GUIDED MISSILE UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2
2.7.1.1 - SNOWPLOW MODE DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER

JF-17
3. While in the air, go in SMS (Stores Management System) page. A/S1 1

4. Select C-701T TV Missile by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then select
7TV.
5. Select the OSB next to PWR OFF to start the alignment sequence.
6. Once selected, the C-701 needs about 3 minutes for alignment. It will go
from 10 UNSTABLE, to 06 MARGINAL and finally 01 GOOD. When
alignment is complete, the ALN TIMING indicator will go to 00:00.
7. Missile Mode is set to AUTO by default T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
8. Set desired Quantity.
7 8
6b
6a
305
2.7.1 – C-701T TV-GUIDED MISSILE 11
2.7.1.1 - SNOWPLOW MODE

THUNDER
9. Go in the MAIN MENU MFCD page and press the OSB (Option Select Button) next to POD. 10
10. Press the OSB next to TVIR to enter the C-701 TV feed page.
JF-17

12. Missile camera will enter a BIT (Built-In Test) mode that starts a warm-up process that will take
about 30 seconds.
13. When missile is ready to be used, the BIT status will disappear and be replaced by the IDLE
status; the missile seeker is caged.
14. Once missile status reaches IDLE and 3-minute alignment is complete, press on the OSB next to
ON to turn ON the missile.
this case, we will use SNOWPLOW (SP) mode. 14a
16. Select AUTO lock mode.
17. Set target size (5 m) 12 13
9b
16
14b
15
17
9a 306
2.7.1 – C-701T TV-GUIDED MISSILE
THUNDER
18. Set TV Missile page as a SOI (Sensor of Interest) by setting the S1

Sensor Selection Switch in the direction of the MFCD (RIGHT if TV
JF-17
page is on the Right MFCD). An asterisk will indicate the SOI status.
19. Slew the TV Missile reticle on a target using the T5 TDC (Target Range to
Designator Controller) slew controls. Use the WIDE/NARROW OSB Target (nm)
to adjust field of view.
20. When missile reticle is over the target, use the T5 TDC PRESS button
(ENTER) to designate the target as a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest).

21. Once a target is designated and missile is less than 10 nm away
from the target, the missile will attempt to lock the target you just
designated (assuming you chose AUTO mode). You can also lock it
in MANUAL mode.
Missile Reticle 22
22. A red diamond will indicate a good missile lock.
21 Reticle
S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch)
18b
19/20

2.7.1 – C-701T TV-GUIDED MISSILE
THUNDER
23. When within 10 nm of the target, press the S3 Weapon

Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») to launch the missile.
JF-17
24. Missile will track its target by itself.

23
308
2.7.1 – C-701 TV-GUIDED MISSILE UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2
2.7.1.2 – SLAVED – TARGETING POD DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER

JF-17

7TV.
7. Missile Mode is set to AUTO by default T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
7 8
6b
6a
309
2.7.1 – C-701 TV-GUIDED MISSILE
2.7.1.2 – SLAVED – TARGETING POD
THUNDER
9. Start the Targeting Pod and uncage it as seen previously.

JF-17
in the direction of the MFCD (LEFT if POD page is on the Left MFCD). An asterisk will indicate
the SOI status.
slew controls. Use Radar Antenna Elevation Switch to zoom in or out. Range to
12. When targeting pod reticle is over the target, use the T5 TDC PRESS button (ENTER) to Target (nm)

Reticle

S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch • UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
11/12

10b
2.7.1 – C-701 TV-GUIDED MISSILE 16

THUNDER
JF-17

17. Missile camera will enter a BIT (Built-In Test) mode that starts a warm-up process that
will take about 30 seconds.
18. When missile is ready to be used, the BIT status will disappear and be replaced by the
IDLE status; the missile seeker is caged.
19. Once missile status reaches IDLE and 3-minute alignment is complete, press on the OSB
next to ON to turn ON the missile.
21. Set target size (5 m) 19a
22. Select desired mode (SP/SNOWPLOW or SLAV/SLAVED) by pressing the OSB next to
SP/SLAV. In this case, we will use SLAVED mode. 17 18
14b
20
19b
22
21
311
14a
THUNDER
23. Once Missile mode is set to SLAVE, it will automatically search 23a
and attempt to track the SPI defined by the targeting pod.
JF-17
24. Set TV Missile page as a SOI (Sensor of Interest) by setting the S1

Sensor Selection Switch in the direction of the MFCD (RIGHT if
TV page is on the Right MFCD). An asterisk will indicate the SOI
status.
25. Once a target is designated and missile is less than 10 nm away
from the target, the missile will attempt to lock the target you
just designated (assuming you chose AUTO mode). You can also
lock it in MANUAL mode using the T5 TDC PRESS. 23b
26
Reticle
25

24b
THUNDER
JF-17
Range to Target (nm)

Targeting Pod Circle &

Missile Cross intersect
Pod Feed TV Feed
313
THUNDER

JF-17

314
2.7.1 – C-701 TV-GUIDED MISSILE UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2
2.7.1.3 – SLAVED – AG Radar DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER

JF-17

7TV.
7. Missile Mode is set to AUTO by default
7 8
6b
6a
315
2.7.1.3 – SLAVED – AG Radar
THUNDER

9. By default, radar MAP mode should already be selected.
JF-17
11. Press the Radar Mode Selector OSB (Option Select Button) to enter the Air-to-Ground Radar
Mode selection menu and press on the OSB next to “GMTI” to select Ground Moving Target
15a 17a
Indicator Mode.
12. Make sure Snowplow Mode is selected (OSB next to SP/SLV toggles Snowplow and Slave T5: TDC (Target Designator
Modes). Controller) Switch
11
15. Slew the TDC Cursor (Radar Crosshair) over the region you want to expand/designate using the
T5 TDC Switch.
16. If you want to use Expanded sub-mode, press the S2/SC (Sensor Control) Switch LEFT.
17. To designate a target/SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) on the Radar Crosshair position, use the T5
13
TDC PRESS switch control (ENTER). This will set the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) at this location
and center the radar image around this SPI. 10
Moving Radar
Contact (Brick)
17a 12
17b
SPI Not Designated SPI Designated
16b 14
15b
Radar Crosshair

THUNDER
18. Use the T5 TDC PRESS switch control (ENTER) a second time. This
will perform a ground-stabilized Moving Target Track (GMTT). The
JF-17
radar will then focus all its energy on the moving vehicle you just
designated.
18c
18b T5: TDC (Target Designator

Controller) Switch
18a
Time-to-Go (to SPI)
Range to
SPI/Crosshair (nm)
317
21
THUNDER
JF-17

22. Missile camera will enter a BIT (Built-In Test) mode that starts a warm-up process that
will take about 30 seconds.
23. When missile is ready to be used, the BIT status will disappear and be replaced by the
IDLE status; the missile seeker is caged.
24. Once missile status reaches IDLE and 3-minute alignment is complete, press on the OSB
next to ON to turn ON the missile.
26. Set target size (5 m)
27. Select desired mode (SP/SNOWPLOW or SLAV/SLAVED) by pressing the OSB next to
SP/SLAV. In this case, we will use SLAVED mode. 22 23
24a
19b
24b
25
27
26
19a 318
THUNDER
28. Once Missile mode is set to SLAVE, it will automatically 28a

search and attempt to track the SPI defined by the
JF-17
targeting pod.
29. Set TV Missile page as a SOI (Sensor of Interest) by setting
the S1 Sensor Selection Switch in the direction of the MFCD
(RIGHT if TV page is on the Right MFCD). An asterisk will
30. Once a target is designated and missile is less than 10 nm

away from the target, the missile will attempt to lock the
target you just designated (assuming you chose AUTO
mode). You can also lock it in MANUAL mode using the T5 28b
TDC PRESS.
31
Reticle
30 29b
THUNDER
32. Approach the target while monitoring TV Missile Feed, the

radar display and the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) diamond
JF-17
on the Heads-Up Display.

SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Diamond Range to Target (nm)

and Missile Cross intersect
TV Feed
Radar Feed
320
THUNDER

JF-17

321
2.7.2 – CM-802AKG TV-GUIDED MISSILE
2.7.2.1 – Introduction
THUNDER
The CM-802AKG is a cruise missile that can be remotely guided to the target, which is what we call the “Man-In-The-Loop”
concept. To use MITL (Man-In-The-Loop) mode to control the missile remotely, the JF-17 needs to carry a datalink pod. The
JF-17
Datalink pod can provide two-way data link between the missile and the aircraft. The pod can transmit and receive signal in 120 deg
360° azimuth, but only below the aircraft wings.
The CM-802AKG missile, on the other hand, can transmit and receive signal from its tail in a cone of 120°. If the missile steers
Data Link
in a direction from which it cannot send you data (i.e. you fall into its blind spot), you will lose connection until you are within
its 120° tail cone again. In the cruise stage (CRS), CM-802AKG has a terrain following capability – you don’t need to worry
about keeping data link connected in that specific stage since the missile will fly on its own.
However, when planning the missile and the aircraft’s flight path, make sure you are within the 120° tail cone of the missile
in order to control it when it reaches the MITL stage.
Datalink Pod WMD-7 Targeting Pod

CM-802AKG Missile
322
2.7.2.2 – DIR (Direct) Release
CM-802AKG Missile Restrictions
THUNDER
DIRECT mode requires a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) to be designated

with an sensor (targeting pod, waypoint, air-to-ground radar, etc.). Allowable Launch Altitude 1600 ft to 24600 ft
JF-17
When launched, the missile will then fly towards this SPI. Allowable Launch Speed Less than Mach 0.9
If a Route Point (TP) is programmed in the missile, the missile will turn
towards this point before looking for the target in the SPI area. Route
Point coordinates need to be entered in any of the DEST waypoints 30
to 35).
Target
Route Points are by no means mandatory for this mode but can help to (SPI set on this point)
bypass defenses. In this tutorial, we will use one.
When the missile is 20 km away from the SPI, the missile will enter Waypoint 1
“MITL” mode, which will allow you to take control of the missile
remotely.
DEST Waypoint Database

Your Position
30 to 35 Waypoints reserved for CM-802AKG and (Weapon Launch)
(RP1 to RP6) C-802AK missile steerpoints (Route Points)
40 SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Coordinates Route Point 1 (RP1)
Coordinates set in DEST 30
59 Reserved waypoint for airfield (editable) 323
THUNDER
1b
Set Route Point 1 (if desired)
JF-17
1. If we want to use one Route Point (or more), we need to enter coordinates on DST
Waypoint 30 for RP1 (Route Point). There are many ways to do it. You can either: TGT1 (Target 1)
Navigation section.
b) Or… Add a Marker on the target via the F10 map and name it “RP1”. Then,
automatically create Waypoint 30 (RP1) for you without having to enter
coordinates manually.
enough to create a NAVIGATION TARGET POINT called “RP1” on the target.
RP1
Route Point (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)
Route Point DEST Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)
RP1 30 42 08 42.1 N 042 04 09.1 E 00031
1a
TGT1 (Target 1)
RP1
324
1c
2.7.2 – CM-802AKG TV-GUIDED MISSILE UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 3
2.7.2.2 – DIR (Direct) Release DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
Set Up Weapon
JF-17

4. While in the air, go in SMS (Stores Management System) page. A/S1 represents the Air-
to-Ground Weapon Profile No. 1, which we will modify.
5. Select CM-802AKG missile by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then select CM8.
6. Select the OSB next to PWR OFF to power up the missile and start its alignment.
7. The missile needs about 3 minutes for alignment (see below HSD). When alignment is
complete, the ALN TIMING indicator will go to 00:00.
8. Set Mode to DIR (Direct)
9. Select Final Attack Mode (POPUP or SKIM). We will choose POPUP.
10. Set Quantity as required.
11. The TGT (Target) point is set to DEST Waypoint 40, which is a waypoint reserved for the
SPI (Sensor Point of Interest). When we designate the SPI, the coordinates will
automatically update.
12. Select desired Missile Cruise Altitude (HIGH = 3500 m, MEDIUM = 1500 m, LOW = 50 m).
6
10
7
8
5 11
9 12 325
THUNDER
Designate SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)

JF-17
13. Start the Targeting Pod and uncage it as seen previously.

in the direction of the MFCD (LEFT if POD page is on the Left MFCD). An asterisk will indicate
the SOI status.

target is within 21 nm. Reticle

15/16

14b
THUNDER
Launch Weapons
JF-17
18. In this mode, the missile seeker will power on 20 km before the designated target point.
SPI Diamond
19. To launch the CM-802AKG, press the S3 Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE »). The missile will fly to the Route
Point RP1 first, then steer to the designated SPI.
20. When the missile is 20 km away from the SPI, the missile will enter “MITL” mode, which will allow you to take control of
the missile remotely. See section 2.7.2.5 for information about MITL guidance.
SPI
19
Targeting Pod (Circle)

and SPI (Diamond) 327
THUNDER
JF-17
328
Note: Distances are not to scale in this picture.
2.7.2 – CM-802AKG TV-GUIDED MISSILE Deal. With. It.
Thanks.
2.7.2.3 – COO (Coordinates) Release
THUNDER
COO mode requires a coordinates to be set in a PP (Pre-Planned Point).

Pre-Planned Point coordinates need to be entered in any of the DEST
JF-17
waypoints 36 to 39. When launched, the missile will then fly towards this Waypoint 1
PP1 / DEST Waypoint 36
Pre-Planned Point. (COO coordinates are
used to guide the missile)
If a Route Point (RP) is programmed in the missile, the missile will turn
towards this point before looking for the target in the SPI area. Route Point
coordinates need to be entered in any of the DEST waypoints 30 to 35). Your Position
(Weapon Launch)
Route Points are by no means mandatory for this mode but can help to
bypass defenses. In this tutorial, we will not use any RP.
When the missile is 20 km away from the Pre-Planned Point, the missile will
enter “MITL” mode, which will allow you to take control of the missile
remotely.
DEST Waypoint Database Pre-Planned Point (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)

00 Aircraft position for INS alignment Target Point DEST Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)
01 to 29 Waypoints reserved for navigation TGT1/ PP1 36 42 14 27.3 N 042 03 04.1 E 00072
40 SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Coordinates CM-802AKG Missile Restrictions
41 to 49 Reserved for Markpoints Allowable Launch Altitude 1600 ft to 24600 ft
50 to 58 Reserved waypoints for airfields closest to Allowable Launch Speed Less than Mach 0.9
59 Reserved waypoint for airfield (editable)
329
2.7.2.3 – COO (Coordinates) Release DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
Set Up Weapon
JF-17

4. Select CM-802AKG missile by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then select
CM8.
5. Select the OSB next to PWR OFF to power up the missile and start its
alignment.
6. The missile needs about 3 minutes for alignment (see below HSD). When
7. Set Mode to COO (Coordinates)
10. Set the PP (Pre-Planned Point) to DEST Waypoint 36 for PP1. This is what the
missile will use as a target reference.
11. Select desired Missile Cruise Altitude (HIGH = 3500 m, MEDIUM = 1500 m,
LOW = 50 m).
7
6
9
4 10
11
330
8
2.7.2.3 – COO (Coordinates) Release
THUNDER
Launch Weapons
JF-17
12. In this mode, the missile seeker will power on 20 km before the
designated target point.
13. To launch the CM-802AKG, press the S3 Weapon Release Button
(« RALT+SPACE »). The missile will fly to the PP1 coordinates SPI Diamond
directly since we have not entered any Route Points. (PP1)
14. When the missile is 20 km away from the Pre-Planned Point, the
missile will enter “MITL” mode, which will allow you to take
control of the missile remotely. See section 2.7.2.5 for 13
information about MITL guidance.
Aircraft
331
CM-802AKG Missile Restrictions
Allowable Launch Altitude 1600 ft to 24600 ft
2.7.2.4 – MAN (Manual) Release
Allowable Launch Speed Less than Mach 0.9
THUNDER
MANUAL mode requires a minimum of

one RP (Route Point). Up to six RPs can
JF-17
be set to define the trajectory of the Route Point 4 (RP4)

missile. The missile will automatically Coordinates set in DEST 33
Target
follow all RPs available in your
database in numerical order (RP1 (DEST Route Point 3 (RP3)
30) first, then RP2 (DEST 31)… until the Coordinates set in DEST 32
last RP).
Route Point coordinates need to be

entered in any of the DEST waypoints
30 to 35). Missile Launch
When the last Route Point is reached,

the missile will enter “MITL” mode,
which will allow you to take control of
the missile remotely.

00 Aircraft position for INS alignment Cruise Mode
30 to 35 Waypoints reserved for CM-802AKG and
Trajectory of Missile
Route Point 1 (RP1)
Route Point 2 (RP2) Coordinates set in DEST 30
332
RP4
THUNDER
TGT1 (Target 1)
Enter Route Point Coordinates
JF-17
1. In order to use Route Points, we need to enter coordinates on DST Waypoint 30 for RP1 (Route Point). There are
RP3
many ways to do it. As an example for RP1, you can either:
a) Press DST button on the UFCP, select Waypoint 30, enter manually the Latitude, Longitude and Elevation
coordinates on the UFCP as shown in the Navigation section.
b) Or… Add a Marker on the target via the F10 map and name it “RP1”. Then, ask the ground crew to update
the DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge), then load the DTC into the aircraft as seen during the start-up
procedure. This will automatically create Waypoint 30 (RP1) for you without having to enter coordinates
1b
manually. RP2
c) Or… Just load the DTC into the aircraft if the Mission Creator was kind enough to create a NAVIGATION
TARGET POINT called “RP1” on the target.
Route Point (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds) RP1

RP1 30 42 06 27.1 N 042 12 02.2 E 00040
TGT1 (Target 1)
RP2 31 42 08 28.1 N 042 08 33.1 E 00043
RP3 32 42 12 26.1 N 042 08 09.1 E 00049 RP4
RP4 33 42 13 28.1 N 042 05 17.1 E 00057
1a
RP3
RP2
1c
333
RP1
THUNDER
You can verify your coordinates by selecting the DEST (Destination) page.
JF-17

RP1 30 42 06 27.1 N 042 12 02.2 E 00040

RP2 31 42 08 28.1 N 042 08 33.1 E 00043
RP3 32 42 12 26.1 N 042 08 09.1 E 00049
RP4 33 42 13 28.1 N 042 05 17.1 E 00057
334
2.7.2.4 – MAN (Manual) Release DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
Set Up Weapon
JF-17

4. While in the air, go in SMS (Stores Management System) page. A/S1 represents the
Air-to-Ground Weapon Profile No. 1, which we will modify.
5. Select CM-802AKG missile by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then select CM8.
6. Select the OSB next to PWR OFF to power up the missile and start its alignment.
7. The missile needs about 3 minutes for alignment (see below HSD). When alignment
is complete, the ALN TIMING indicator will go to 00:00.
8. Set Mode to MAN (Manual)
9. Final Attack is irrelevant for this mode since Man-In-The-Loop requires manual
control.
11. The FP field displays the Route Points (RPs) selected for the missile trajectory.
DEST Waypoints 30, 31, 32 and 33 are used for RP1, RP2, RP3 and RP4.
12. Select desired Missile Cruise Altitude (HIGH = 3500 m, MEDIUM = 1500 m, LOW =
50 m).
8 7
10
5 11
12
335
9
THUNDER
17b
Launch Weapons
JF-17
13. In MANUAL mode, the missile seeker will power on 2 km before the
last RP (Route Point), which would be RP4 in our case. Once seeker is
powered on, the missile will enter MITL (Man-In-The-Loop) mode,
which allows you to remotely control the missile with the TDC.
14. To launch the CM-802AKG, press the S3 Weapon Release Button
(« RALT+SPACE »).
15. The missile will fly to the RP1 coordinates, then follow RP2, RP3 and
RP4. 17a
16. Go in the MAIN MENU MFCD page and press the OSB (Option Select
Button) next to POD.
Missile 1
17. Press the OSB next to MIL (Man-In-Loop) to enter the DLPOD Missile heading
Missile coordinates Feed Selected
(Datalink Pod) feed page.
18. After a few seconds, the DLPOD feed will start receiving datalink
signal, which will give you missile coordinates, distance to current RP
and time since launch.
18
16b
Missile Flight Time
since Launch (sec)
Distance to Selected RP (Route Point)

Missile Mode Selector
CRS = CRUISE
Route Point Currently Tracked by Missile (RP1 of four RPs total) 14
Note: you can choose what RP the missile tracks using the OSBs S3: Weapon Launch/Release Button
next to the arrows
16a 336
THUNDER
JF-17
Route Point 4 (RP4)

Target
Route Point 3 (RP3)

Missile tracking RP1

Missile heading 265 Missile Launch
10 nm from RP1
17 sec after launch
Cruise Mode
Trajectory of Missile
Missile tracking RP2 Route Point 1 (RP1)

Route Point 2 (RP2) Coordinates set in DEST 30
Missile heading 296 Coordinates set in DEST 31
2 nm from RP1
1 min 16 sec after launch
337
THUNDER
19. When the missile is near enough the last Route Point, the TKJ countdown timer will appear to indicate the time remaining until the missile seeker powers on automatically.
20. The missile seeker automatically powers on 2 km before the last RP (Route Point), which is RP4 in our case. Once seeker is powered on, the missile enters MITL (Man-In-The-
JF-17
Loop) mode, which allows you to remotely control the missile with the TDC. Video signal will go live. See section 2.7.2.5 for information about MITL guidance.
Route Point 4 (RP4)

Target
Lost Datalink Feed since

Route Point 3 (RP3)
aircraft is not in 120 deg tail
cone of missile
Missile tracking RP3 Missile Launch

Missile heading 350
3 nm from RP3
Cruise Mode
19 Trajectory of Missile
Missile tracking RP4

Route Point 1 (RP1)
Missile heading 296 Route Point 2 (RP2) Coordinates set in DEST 30
2 nm from RP4 Coordinates set in DEST 31
338
2.7.2 – CM-802AKG TV-GUIDED MISSILE Missile
2.7.2.5 – MITL (Man-In-The-Loop) Guidance
THUNDER
Target Route Point 4 (RP4)

1. Once missile is fired, go in the MAIN MENU MFCD page and press the OSB (Option Select Coordinates set in DEST 33
Button) next to POD.
JF-17
2. Press the OSB next to MIL (Man-In-Loop) to enter the DLPOD (Datalink Pod) feed page.
3. After a few seconds, the DLPOD feed will start receiving datalink signal, which will give
you missile coordinates, distance to current RP (if applicable) and time since launch.
4. The missile seeker automatically powers on :
• In DIR mode: 20 km away from the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)
• In COO mode: 20 km away from the Pre-Planned Point

• In MAN mode: 2 km before the last RP (Route Point), which is RP4 in our case.
5. If you want to manually power on the seeker, select CRS (Missile Cruise Mode). However,
this is purely optional.
6. Once seeker is powered on, the missile enters MITL (Man-In-The-Loop) mode, which
allows you to remotely control the missile with the TDC. Video signal will go live.
6
1b 2a
2b
5
1a 339
THUNDER
7. Set Datalink Pod page as a SOI (Sensor of Interest) by setting the S1 Sensor Selection Switch in
the direction of the MFCD (DOWN if POD page is on the Center MFCD). An asterisk will
JF-17
indicate the SOI status. This will allow you to control the missile with the TDC.
8. Use T5 TDC controls UP/DOWN/LEFT/RIGHT to steer the missile on the target until impact.
• Note: Control the missile gently since abrupt attitude changes will cause image noise
and skew the aiming process. Keep your aircraft within the 120 deg tail cone of the
missile to maintain datalink contact.
7b
7a 8
S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch 340
THUNDER
JF-17
341
2.8 – LD-10 ANTI-RADIATION MISSILE
INTRODUCTION
THUNDER
Suppression of Enemy Air Defenses (SEAD, also known in the United States as "Wild Weasel" and (initially) "Iron Hand"
operations) are military actions to suppress enemy surface-based air defenses, including not only surface-to-air
JF-17
missiles (SAMs) and anti-aircraft artillery (AAA) but also interrelated systems such as early-warning radar and command,
control and communication (C3) functions, while also marking other targets to be destroyed by an air strike. Suppression
can be accomplished both by physically destroying the systems or by disrupting and deceiving them through electronic
warfare.
The LD-10 ARM (Anti-radiation Missile) is a tactical, air-to-surface anti-radiation missile designed to home in on electronic
transmissions coming from surface-to-air radar systems. The LD-10 can detect, attack and destroy a radar LD-10
antenna or transmitter with minimal aircrew input. The proportional guidance system that homes in on enemy radar
emissions has a fixed antenna and seeker head in the missile's nose.
TLDR version? The LD-10 mainly homes on radar emitters. The best way to use the ARM is to use the HSD page with the
RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) and MAWS (Missile Approach Warning System) together to detect which radar emitters
are actively tracking, which ones are locking you, what level of threat each emitter poses, and which one to target.
SA6 SAM Site
342
2.8 – LD-10 ANTI-RADIATION MISSILE
Flying at high altitudes greatly enhances the LD-10’s range. However, the higher you are, the easier you are to find by
INTRODUCTION enemy radars. Keep in mind that doing SEAD operations means that you will be locked by multiple radar stations and SAM
THUNDER
sites can fire missiles on you or on your own ARM missiles. This means that your countermeasures programs must be ready
The LD-10 is an ARM (Anti-Radiation Missile) that is at all times and you must often break away from the target once you have fired your weapon. A great way to do SEAD is to
intended to search and destroy radar emitters. It has three use terrain to mask your approach and fire your weapons at the last second before breaking off back your egress route.
JF-17
main operation modes:
ACT (Active) Mode

The active mode of the LD-10 requires you to designate a
point as a Sensor Point of Interest (SPI) with any of your
sensors like your radar, targeting pod, HUD or a waypoint.

The missile will use this SPI as a reference point to search
for radar emitters in this specific area. This mode is similar
to the HaS (HARM-as-Sensor) mode of the HARM missile of
a F-16.
PAS (Passive) Mode

If we launch a missile when multiple radar emitters are in
the area, the LD-10 will choose by itself which emitter to
track. This method is more or less “fire and forget” as
means to clear areas from SAM threats. This mode is
similar to the MAD DOG mode of the SD-10 active radar
homing missile.
SP (Self-Protection Mode) Mode

If we launch a missile when we are locked by a radar
emitter or the MAWS has detected a missile launch
heading our way, the ARM will track this emitter.
The maximum range of this missile is about 40 nm. A higher

launch altitude and airspeed means a better missile range.
343
2.8.1 – LD-10 ANTI-RADIATION MISSILE UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2
(ACT, Active) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER

JF-17

4. Select LD-10 Anti-Radiation Missile by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then
select LD10.
6. Once selected, the LD-10 needs about 3 minutes for alignment. It will go
7. Set Missile Mode to ACT (Active) T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
7 8
344
2.8.1 – LD-10 ANTI-RADIATION MISSILE
(ACT, Active)
THUNDER
9. Set a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) near the suspected area of a

radar emitter. It can be a designation point from the HUD, from
JF-17
the Targeting Pod, from the Air-to-Ground radar, or from a Waypoint 1 (SPI)
waypoint. In our case we will use a waypoint.
10. Press RTN on the UFCP (returns to Main Menu), then select DEST
Waypoint 01, which is located near the target. This will slave the
missile sensor to the designated SPI on Waypoint 1.
SA-8 SAM
10b
Waypoint 1 (SPI)
10a
345
(ACT, Active)
THUNDER
11. Fly the towards the designated SPI (Waypoint 1).

12. When within 20-40 nm, press the S3 Weapon Release Button
JF-17
(« RALT+SPACE ») and break away from SAM site.

13. The missile will use the SPI as a reference point to search for radar
emitters in this specific area.
Note: you cannot select what emitter to fire on.

SA-8 SAM
Waypoint 1 (SPI)
12
SPI
346
(PAS, Passive) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER

JF-17

select LD10.
7. Set Missile Mode to PAS (Passive) T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
7 8
347
(PAS, Passive)
THUNDER
9. Fly towards radar emitters spotted on the HSD (Horizontal Situation Indicator).
10. When within 20-40 nm, press the S3 Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») and break away from SAM site.
JF-17
11. LD-10 will choose by itself which emitter to track.
SA-8 SAM SA-8 SAM

SA-8 SAM
SA-8 SAM
10
Aircraft
348
(SP, Self-Protect) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER

JF-17

select LD10.
7. Set Missile Mode to SP (Self-Protect) T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
7 8
349
(SP, Self-Protect)
THUNDER
9. Fly towards radar emitters spotted on the HSD (Horizontal Situation Indicator).
SA-8 SAM SA-8 SAM
10. When you are locked by a radar or missile, press the S3 Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») and
JF-17
(Radar Locking + SA-8 SAM

break away from SAM site.
Launching Missile)
11. When the missile is launched, the ARM will track the radar emitter that is locking you.

Aircraft
Missile Launch Warning
10

350
(SP, Self-Protect)
THUNDER
JF-17
351
Note: Distances are not to scale in this picture.
2.9.1 – C-802AK ANTI-SHIP MISSILE Deal. With. It.
(DIR, Direct) Thanks.
THUNDER
Ship
DIRECT mode requires a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) (10 nm from TP)
to be designated with the Air-to-Sea radar (or any Your Position
JF-17
other sensor). When launched, the missile will then (Weapon Launch)
fly towards this SPI.
If a Turnpoint (TP) is programmed in the missile, the

missile will turn towards this point before looking for
a ship in the SPI area. Turnpoint coordinates need to

be entered in any of the DEST waypoints 30 to 35,
also known as Route Points).
Turnpoints are by no means mandatory but do help

in improving the odds of severely damaging a ship.
For this tutorial, we will use one.
Waypoint 1
(SPI, Sensor Point of Interest)
TP (Turnpoint)
Route Point 1 (RP1)
DEST Waypoint Database Coordinates set in DEST 30

30 to 35 Waypoints reserved for CM-802AKG and
C-802AK Missile Restrictions
(PP1 to PP4) targets (Pre-Planned Points) Allowable Launch Altitude 1600 ft to 24600 ft
40 SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Coordinates Allowable Launch Speed Less than Mach 0.9

352
2.9.1 – C-802AK ANTI-SHIP MISSILE
(DIR, Direct) 1b
THUNDER
Set Turnpoint – Route Point 1 (if desired)

JF-17
1. If we want to use a Turnpoint, we need to enter coordinates on DST Waypoint 30

for RP1 (Route Point). There are many ways to do it. You can either: TGT1 (Target 1)
Navigation section.
b) Or… Add a Marker on the target via the F10 map and name it “RP1”. Then,
RP1 (Turnpoint)
automatically create Waypoint 30 (RP1) for you without having to enter
coordinates manually.
enough to create a NAVIGATION TARGET POINT called “RP1” on the target.

RP1 30 41 57 55.1 N 041 16 38.1 E 00000
1a
1c
TGT1 (Target 1)
RP1 (Turnpoint)
353
2.9.1 – C-802AK ANTI-SHIP MISSILE UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 3
(DIR, Direct) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
Set Up Weapon
JF-17

5. Select C-802AK missile by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then select 802.
7. Set Mode to DIR (Direct)
8. Set Fuze (Direct/Delay), Quantity and Target Size as required.
9. Sea Condition (Skimming Altitude) is inoperative.
10. Once selected, the missile needs about 3 minutes for alignment. It will go
alignment is complete, the ALN indicator will go to 00:00.
10a
10
6
7
5
9
10b
8
354
(DIR, Direct) 11a
THUNDER
Set Up Weapon
JF-17

12. Select desired Missile Cruise Altitude (HIGH = 3500 m, MEDIUM = 1500 m, LOW = 50 m).
13. Press OSB next to TP (Turnpoint) to select which DEST waypoint is to be used as the Turnpoint. In our case, DEST waypoint 30 (Route Point RP1) will be used.
15. Select desired Search Mode (EFF mode powers up the missile’s radar seeker 10 seconds after launch, while CC mode powers up the missile’s radar seeker when
missile is 25 km away from the target).
11b
12b
12a
13b
13a
15b
15a 14b
14a
355
17 16 Slew TDC on ship and TDC
2.9.1 – C-802AK ANTI-SHIP MISSILE PRESS to set this point as SPI
(DIR, Direct)
THUNDER
Designate SPI (Sensor Point of Interest)

JF-17
16. Turn on radar by pressing the Radar STBY/ON button.

17. Select SEA1 mode.
18. Set radar page as a SOI (Sensor of Interest) by setting the S1 Sensor Selection Switch in the
direction of the MFCD (AFT if RADAR page is on the center MFCD). An asterisk will indicate the
SOI status.
19. Slew the TDC reticle on a target using the T5 TDC (Target Designator Controller) slew controls. Ship
20. When TDC reticle is over a naval radar contact, use the T5 TDC PRESS button (ENTER) to

• UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) TDC (Radar Crosshair/Cursor)
18b
19/20

2.9.1 – C-802AK ANTI-SHIP MISSILE SPI Coordinates
(DIR, Direct)
THUNDER
Launch Weapons SPI Diamond

JF-17
21. When lined up with the SPI (Sensor Point of Interest), press the
S3 Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE »). The missile will fly
to the turnpoint (Route Point 1) first, then steer to the RP1
designated SPI, then track any ship in its path. (Turnpoint)
SPI Diamond
SPI
Time & Distance (nm) to SPI
357
(DIR, Direct)
THUNDER
JF-17
358
2.9.2 – C-802AK ANTI-SHIP MISSILE C-802AK Missile Restrictions
Allowable Launch Altitude 1600 ft to 24600 ft
(COO, Coordinates)
Allowable Launch Speed Less than Mach 0.9 Ship
THUNDER
(20 nm from aircraft)

COO mode requires a coordinates to be manually
entered. When launched, the missile will then fly Note: Distances are not to scale in this picture.
JF-17
towards these coordinates. Deal. With. It.

Your Position
(Weapon Launch)
Thanks.
If a Turnpoint (TP) is programmed in the missile, the
missile will turn towards this point before looking for
a ship in the SPI area. Turnpoint coordinates need to
be entered in any of the DEST waypoints 30 to 35,

also known as Route Points).
Turnpoints are by no means mandatory but do help

Waypoint 2
in improving the odds of severely damaging a ship.
(COO coordinates are
For this tutorial, we will not use a turnpoint. used to guide the missile)
Waypoint 1
DEST Waypoint Database Route Point (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)

00 Aircraft position for INS alignment Target Point DEST Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)
01 to 29 Waypoints reserved for navigation TGT1/ WP2 02 42 02 47.1 N 041 30 18.1 E 00000
359
2.9.2 – C-802AK ANTI-SHIP MISSILE UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2
(COO, Coordinates) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
Set Up Weapon
JF-17

4. Select C-802AK missile by pressing the OSB next to WPN, then select 802.
6. Set Mode to COO (Coordinates)
7. Set Fuze (Direct/Delay), Quantity and Target Size as required.
8. Sea Condition (Skimming Altitude) is inoperative.
9. Once selected, the missile needs about 3 minutes for alignment. It will go
alignment is complete, the ALN indicator will go to 00:00.
9a
4
8
9b
7
7 360
2.9.2 – C-802AK ANTI-SHIP MISSILE 11b 12b
(COO, Coordinates)
THUNDER
Enter Target Coordinates & Set Up Weapon

JF-17

11. Select the LAT field and enter Latitude coordinates (420247).
12. Select the LON field and enter Longitude coordinates (0413018).
12. Select desired Missile Cruise Altitude (HIGH = 3500 m, MEDIUM = 1500
m, LOW = 50 m).
13. If desired, press OSB next to TP (Turnpoint) to select which DEST

waypoint is to be used as the Turnpoint. In our case, we will leave it to
OFF.
14. Select Final Attack Mode (POPUP or SKIM). We will choose SKIM.
15. Select desired Search Mode (EFF mode powers up the missile’s radar
seeker 10 seconds after launch, while CC mode powers up the missile’s Route Point (Deg Min Sec.Decimal-Seconds)
radar seeker when missile is 25 km away from the target).
Target Point DEST Point Latitude Longitude Elevation (ft)
10a
TGT1/ WP2 02 42 02 47.1 N 041 30 18.1 E 00000
10b
12
11a
13
14
12a
15
361
(COO, Coordinates)
THUNDER
Launch Weapons
JF-17
16. When lined up with the ship, press the S3 Weapon Release Button
(« RALT+SPACE »). The missile will fly to the designated coordinates, then
steer towards any ship in its path.
Waypoint 2
(Ship Location)
Aircraft
16
362
(COO, Coordinates)
THUNDER
JF-17
363
2.9.3 – C-802AK ANTI-SHIP MISSILE Ship
Waypoint 1
(LOS, Line-of-Sight) (20 nm from aircraft)

THUNDER
LOS (Line of Sight) mode is the simplest but less reliable

way to employ anti-ship missiles; when launched, the
JF-17
missile will keep going forward until it detects a ship

Your Position
within its line of sight, then track it.
(Weapon Launch)
Its employment is pretty much “fire and forget”. Spot a
target with the air-to-sea radar, line up the aircraft with
the ship, launch, then hope for the best.

C-802AK Missile Restrictions
This mode is used almost exactly like the other modes,
but it has less options to work with and cannot use Allowable Launch Altitude 1600 ft to 24600 ft
Turnpoints.
Allowable Launch Speed Less than Mach 0.9
Waypoint 1
Ship
364
3.1 – PL-5EII INFRARED HOMING MISSILE UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2
1. Set Master Arm Switch – ON (UP)
THUNDER
2. Set MMS (Master Mode Switch) to AA INTC. TWS is selected by default.

3. Press S8 Missile Type Selection switch until the PL-5EII missiles are
selected. The missile will need a few seconds for warm-up (PL5 ON
JF-17
1
indication will blink during that warm-up period).
4. You can toggle between PL5 missiles by using the S5 Missile Step button.
4 S5: Missile Step Button/NWS

3 (Nosewheel Steering) Control Button
3 S8: Missile Type Selection Button
365
3.1 – PL-5EII INFRARED HOMING MISSILE
5. Missile should be actively looking for a lock on the closest heat signature.
THUNDER
6. Uncage the PL-5E missile with the T2 Countermeasure PRESS Switch. The
binding is called « T2_Press: AG Manual Mode/DGFT Missile Designator
Control ».
JF-17
7. Fly to place the target inside the PL5 seeker circle until a high-pitched
audio sound confirms that the missile’s seeker has acquired a solid lock.
The seeker circle will move over the target and keep it locked.
8. Press the S3 Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») to launch missile.
PL5 Seeker Circle

• FWD: Self-Protection Jammer Toggle

366
3.2.1 – SD-10 ACTIVE RADAR HOMING MISSILE UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 2
(RADAR LOCK) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER
1. Set Master Arm Switch – ON (UP)

JF-17
1
3. Press S8 Missile Type Selection switch until the SD10 missiles are selected.
The missile will need a few seconds for warm-up (SD10 ON indication will
blink during that warm-up period).
4. You can toggle between SD10 missiles by using the S5 Missile Step button.
5. Set radar mode from STANDBY to ON by pressing the Radar Standby/ON
Selector.
6. Verify that Center MFCD is set as the Sensor of Interest (SOI). An asterisk
will indicate the radar screen is the SOI. If another sensor/display is set as
the SOI, press Sensor Select Switch AFT. T5: TDC (Target Designator Controller) Switch
7. Set desired radar range scale (a, 40 nm), radar azimuth range (b, 25 deg)
and radar Repetition Frequency (c, HI) and bar mode (d, 2 bars) T6: Radar Antenna Elevation Switch

4 5
7a
Radar Contact 3
7b 7c
T5: TDC
7d
3
S8: Missile Type
Selection Button
367
6a S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch 6b
3.2.1 – SD-10 ACTIVE RADAR HOMING MISSILE
(RADAR LOCK)
THUNDER
Take note that if the aircraft is connected to a datalink network, the radar scan cone and SD-10 missile range will be visible on the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display). We will talk about this further in the
Datalink section.
JF-17
HSD (Horizontal Situation Indicator)

Missile Maximum Range Cone
368
3.2.1 – SD-10 ACTIVE RADAR HOMING MISSILE • Arrow > on the left of the box indicates
target is within max range.
(RADAR LOCK) • Arrow ^ below the box indicates target is
within no-escape zone.
THUNDER
8. Slew the TDC (Target Designator Controller) over a TD Box Direction Arrow • Arrow v above the box indicates target is
TD (Target beyond the no-escape zone.
desired target and “bug” him by pressing the
JF-17
Designation) Box • Arrow < on the right of the TD box

T5/TDC PRESS (ENTER). This is NOT a radar lock;
you have merely set a target as the HPT (High Steering dot indicates target is at minimum range.
Priority Target), which is represented as a circle.
Other SPTs (Secondary Priority Targets) will be
displayed as well without a circle.
9. If you press the TDC (ENTER) a second time, you

will radar lock the desired target to STT (Single
Target Track) mode.
Range (nm)
Closure Speed (kts)
ASE (Allowable Steering Error) Circle Target Aspect
8 TOF (Time of Flight) 9
Locked Target Data:

Distance
Time to Impact
Closure Speed
Target Aspect
8 9
369
Target Designation (TD) Box
3.2.1 – SD-10 ACTIVE RADAR HOMING MISSILE TOA
TOF
(RADAR LOCK)
Target Within Weapon No Escape Zone
THUNDER
10. Fly to place target in ASE (Allowable Steering Error) circle on the HUD.
11. Fly to place the Steering Dot inside the ASE circle
JF-17
12. When SHOOT cue appears on the HUD, the target will be within the No 10
Escape Zone: you are in range to fire the missile.
13. Press the S3 Weapon Release Button (« RALT+SPACE ») to launch missile.
14. When missile is launched, the TOF (Time of Flight) indication indicating the
total missile flight time to the target will then switch to TOA (Time of
Activation), which represents the time remaining until the missile goes
ACTIVE and starts using its own radar seeker.
15. When TOA reaches 0, missile will start using its own seeker to track the
target. The missile will go active, or « pitbull », and attempt to track the
target until impact.
TOF TOA
Note: You can unlock target by using the S2 Sensor Control Switch DEPRESS. 14a 14b
12

(Green Bar)
370
(RADAR LOCK)
THUNDER
Target
When you first fire a SD-10 missile, the missile is initially guided by your own radar. However, an « active radar
JF-17
homing missile » also has his own radar inside the seeker head. The moment the missile goes « active »
(meaning it will start self-homing/tracking targets on his own instead of using your aircraft’s radar) is called
« Pitbull ». When the missile goes « Pitbull », the missile truly becomes fire-and-forget. NATO brevity word
“Pitbull" would be called out on the radio to inform other pilots, just as "Fox Three" would be called out upon
launch.
Missile goes
Active (Pitbull)
Aircraft
371
(MAD DOG MODE) SD-10 selected & armed
THUNDER
When the SD-10 is selected and there is no radar lock yet, a large dashed circle will appear on the HUD if you bug a target using TWS.
JF-17
This circle is the seeker field of view if the missile is launched with no radar lock, which is termed a Mad Dog Launch. A Mad Dog
Launch will lock on to intercept the first target the missile seeker detects within the dashed circle area out to 10 miles.
As an example, when using TWS mode, you have slewed the TDC (Target Designator Controller) over a desired target and “bugged” it
by pressing the T5/TDC PRESS (ENTER). This is NOT a radar lock; you have merely set a target as the HPT (High Priority Target), which is
represented as a circle. The Mad Dog Launch Field-of-View circle appears
TWS Selected, but no STT Lock
Mad Dog Launch Field-of-View Circle
Mad Dog Launch

Field-of-View Circle
Bugged Target (HPT,

High Priority Target)
372
(HOJ, HOME-ON-JAM MODE)
THUNDER
JF-17
373
3.3.1 – GSH-23-2 CANNON (AIR-TO-AIR) UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
(SS, SNAPSHOT SIGHT MODE) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
2
THUNDER

JF-17
3. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page.

4. Select GSh-23 Gun by pressing the OSB next to GUN. The weapon profile will 6b
automatically switch to the Air-to-Air Gun Profile.

7. Select Gunsight Type (SS) by pressing the OSB next to GUN SIGHT, then select 7b
SS mode.
will keep blinking.
Number of rounds
8
4
S1: SS (Sensor
Selection) Switch
6a
7a
374
3.3.1 – GSH-23-2 CANNON (AIR-TO-AIR)
(SS, SNAPSHOT SIGHT MODE)
THUNDER
9. Acquire a radar lock on the target with ACM Mode.

10. Align gunsight range line on target.
JF-17
11. Press and hold the S4 Gun Trigger (« SPACE ») to fire the gun
Gun Boresight Cross
Gunsight
Range line
Historic hot point
S4: Gun Trigger

and Weapon Mode Information Target Range
Target Closure Speed
375
MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation) 2
(LCOS, LEAD COMPUTING OPTICAL SIGHT MODE) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
THUNDER

JF-17


7. Select Gunsight Type (LCOS) by pressing the OSB next to GUN SIGHT, then
select LCOS mode.
7b
will keep blinking.
Number of rounds 8
4
S1: SS (Sensor
Selection) Switch
6a
7a
376
(LCOS, LEAD COMPUTING OPTICAL SIGHT MODE)
THUNDER
9. Acquire a radar lock on the target with ACM Mode. Select

Closure Speed
ACM Mode by pressing the S1 Sensor Selection Switch FWD.
(200 kts per mark)
JF-17
10. Align gunsight pipper on the target and wait for the pipper to Shown: 217 kts
unwind
11. When gunsight pipper starts unwinding, press and hold the S4
Gun Trigger (« SPACE »)
Gun Boresight Cross

Distance from Target
(400 ft per mark)
Shown: 1500 ft (approx. 0.2 nm)
Gunsight Pipper
Target Range
S4: Gun Trigger

377
(SSLC, SNAPSHOT SIGHT LEAD COMPUTING MODE) DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
2
THUNDER

JF-17


7. Select Gunsight Type (SSLC) by pressing the OSB next to GUN SIGHT, then
select SSLC mode.
fired. The FEED function can be used if the gun jams, but it can only be used 7b
will keep blinking.
Number of rounds
8
4
S1: SS (Sensor
Selection) Switch
1
6a
7a
378
(SSLC, SNAPSHOT SIGHT LEAD COMPUTING MODE)
THUNDER
9. Acquire a radar lock on the target with ACM Mode. Select ACM
Mode by pressing the S1 Sensor Selection Switch FWD.
JF-17
10. Align gunsight pipper on the target and wait for the pipper to
unwind. This mode combines SS and LCOS modes.
11. When gunsight pipper starts unwinding, press and hold the S4
Gun Trigger (« SPACE »)
Gun Boresight Cross
Gunsight Pipper
Historic hot point
Closure Speed
(200 kts per mark)
Shown: 24 kts
Distance from Target

(400 ft per mark)
Shown: 4000 ft (approx. 0.5 nm)
S4: Gun Trigger Target Range

379
4 – SELECTIVE ORDNANCE JETTISON
THUNDER
2. Go in SMS (Stores Management System) page

3. Select JET sub-menu
4. Select the ordnance you want to drop by pressing
JF-17
their respective OSBs. When selected, stations are

boxed.
5. To jettison selected stations, press the S3 Weapon
Release Button (« RALT+SPACE »)
S3: Weapon
5 Launch/Release Button
2 3
4
380
JF-17
PART 13 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES THUNDER
381
INTRODUCTION
Countermeasures are very simple to use. You have three countermeasure types at
THUNDER
your disposal: flares, chaff and an ECM (Electronic Countermeasure) jammer. We will
explore together what is used against what, and how.
JF-17
Missiles can generally track you using 2 things: radar signature (radar waves are sent
on you and you reflect them, which is called a “radar signature”) and heat signature
(like the exhaust of your engines). Countermeasures will only be effective against the
PART 13 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES
kind of weapon it was meant to counter; a heat-seeking missile will not care if you
deploy electronic countermeasures against it since it tracks heat, not radar signatures. Chaff
This is why it is important to know what is attacking you in order to counter it
properly. This is what the RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) is for: to help you know what
is firing at you so you can take the adequate action to counter it.
Flares are used against missiles that track heat (infrared or IR) signatures. Instead of
going for the heat signature generated by your engines, a missile will go for a hotter
heat source like flares.
Chaff is a form of “passive” jamming. Passive (reflected) jamming is when a deceptive

object or device reflects radar waves. Chaff is simply a bundle of small pieces of metal
foil with reflective coating, which creates clusters of radar signatures that prevent a Flare
radar to get a solid lock on the aircraft itself.
The KG-600 Self Protection Jammer (SPJ) is the onboard Electronic Countermeasure
(ECM) system. It is a form of “continuous” jamming, also called “active” or
“transmitted” jamming. This device transmits its own synchronized radar waves back
at your enemy’s radar receiver to simulate erroneous radar wave returns. Simply put,
active jamming will try to drown a radar in white noise.
In order to use these three forms of countermeasures, you can use “countermeasure
programs”, routines that will deploy a number of flares/chaff for a number of cycles at
a given interval. Both Flare and Chaff are released with the OESP (Optical/Electronic
Self Protection) dispenser system. Preset Countermeasure Release programs can be
set in the DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) in the “Special Options”.
382
THUNDER
JF-17
PART 13 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES COUNTERMEASURES CONTROL SETUP
T2 AFT – Countermeasures Dispense

T2 FWD – SPJ Standby/Jam

• FWD: Self-Protection Jammer Toggle
383
RWR Threat Number Setting
RWR (RADAR WARNING RECEIVER) Sets the number of RWR contacts displayed on the HSD
Non-Lethal / Low Threat RWR Area
• OPEN (All) / PRTY (Priority)
THUNDER
The RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) will tell if you are being searched or locked by radar. The RWR is
overlayed on the HSD (Horizontal Situation Indicator) page; you will have a top-down view of your
aircraft. The RWR is powered ON using the RWR Power button on the Avionics Activation Panel.
JF-17
The HSD RWR page will locate the radar emitters’ heading but not their range. Instead, their spacing from
the center of the RWR circle refers to the lethality of the threat. The inner band (lethal) is for radars
actively tracking you. The outer band is classified as non-lethal since these are radars searching for you,
not actively tracking you.
The HUD (Heads-Up Display) will also inform you if a missile launch is detected (MSL LCH).
Lethal Threat RWR Area
MSL LCH Warning RWR Power Button

Missile launch from a
platform is detected
384
Main Surface Threat
RWR (RADAR WARNING RECEIVER) Defines priority
Secondary AAA Threat

THUNDER
RWR Symbol States (Anti-Air Artillery radar)

• Yellow: Radar is scanning you but has no lock on you yet
JF-17
• Red: Radar is locking and tracking you. Accompanied by the (very annoying) aural Main AAA Threat
warning “Tracking! Tracking! Tracking!” (Anti-Air Artillery radar)
• Flashing: Missile has been launched by radar emitter and is heading towards you.
Accompanied by a high-pitch beeping sound. Secondary Sea Threat

(ship radar)
Mirage 2000 Pyotr Velikiy Ship
Main Air Threat Main Sea Threat Main Sea Threat
(ship radar)
Secondary Air Threat

(Air-to-Air radar)
Secondary Air Threat

Underlined = Emitter Under Jamming
(Air-to-Air radar)
MiG-29
Secondary Air Threat Main Air Threat
SA-8 SAM Site Grisha Ship (Air-to-Air radar)
Secondary Sea Threat 385
Secondary AAA Threat
JF-17
PART 13 – DEFENCE: RWR & COUNTERMEASURES THUNDER
RWR (RADAR WARNING RECEIVER)
386
Missile Type Symbol
MAWS • A number displays a type of
(MISSILE APPROACH WARNING SYSTEM) active radar homing missile. 120
• “M” displays any other type
THUNDER
of missile (i.e. semi-active).

The MAWS is the Missile Approach Warning System. MAWS
detectors are installed on the sides of the vertical stabilizer
JF-17
Missile Detected Symbol

to prioritize the protection of the aircraft’s rear Missile Detected Above
Missile is at the same altitude
hemisphere. However, the MAWS detects missile launches Aircraft Symbol
from all directions. as your aircraft +/- 100 meters
Missile is above your aircraft
MAWS displays missile symbols on the HSD RWR display. It

shows missile bearing but has no range information. Take
note that the MAWS have higher chances for successful
detection when the missile range is within 5 km.
MISSILE Warning
Active missile seeker
radiation is detected
Missile Detected Below Aircraft Symbol
Missile is below your aircraft
MAWS
Super S530D Semi-Active
Radar Homing Missile
(above aircraft)
AIM-120 Active Radar

Homing Missile
(same altitude as aircraft)
387
COUNTERMEASURES - CHAFF & FLARES
OESP RELEASE PROGRAM CREATION & DATA TRANSFER CARTRIDGE
THUNDER
Countermeasure release programs are stored in the DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge). In order to create your own
programs, you need to go in the “Special Options” menu.
JF-17
Countermeasure programs are loaded in the aircraft when the cartridge is inserted in the DTC slot, then
loaded via the DTC page. Countermeasure information is stocked in the EWS (Electronic Warfare System) DTC
data set.
EWS Data loaded
You can choose what program to use via the OESP sub-menu of the CMBT (Combat) page.
from DTC
Special Options
OESP Sub-Page
388
COUNTERMEASURES - CHAFF & FLARES
OESP (OPTICAL/ELECTRONIC SELF PROTECTION) DISPENSER SYSTEM
THUNDER
COUNTERMEASURE USAGE TUTORIAL

JF-17
Note: The JF-17 can carry up to 36 chaffs and 32 flares. 5 different preset release programs are
available.
1. Select CMBT (Combat) Menu

2. If not powered ON already, press the OESP (Optical/Electronic Self-Protection Dispenser) Power
Chaff Count
Button. Flare Count
3. Select dispenser release mode: AUTO (countermeasures will automatically deploy for you) or MAN
(Manual, selected release program will dispense countermeasures when you set the T2 3
Countermeasure switch AFT)
4. Select Release Program by either toggling the PROG OSB (Option Select Button) or by toggling the
Current Countermeasure Type OSB.
5. Press the T2 Countermeasure Switch AFT (COUNTERMEASURE DISPENSER) to start jamming (Q
binding).
Chaff Bingo Quantity

Countermeasure Type Setting
CH: Chaff Only
FL: Flare Only
CH+FL: Chaff and Flares Flare Bingo Quantity
Setting
Program Selected
5
2 T2: Countermeasure Switch
• AFT: Countermeasures Dispense
389
1
KG-600 SPJ
(SELF PROTECTION JAMMER)
THUNDER
The KG-600 Self Protection Jammer (SPJ) is the onboard Electronic Countermeasure
(ECM) system. The KG-600 detects and deceives threat pulse fire control and guidance
JF-17
RADARs and has three operating modes: standby, jamming (transmit), and built in test.
This ECM system detects, processes, and transmits a simulated target echo for
deception when a radar signal is received. The simulated echoes are recognized by the
enemy radar as true target returns. Tracking radar then tracks a false target and breaks
lock from the true target. Threat radar indications are indicated on the Radar Warning
Receiver.
The jammer modes can be accessed in the CMBT page in the OESP (Optical/Electronic
Self Protection) sub-menu.
KG-600 Self-Protection Jammer Pod
Jammer Modes
• OFF
• BIT: Built-In Test In Progress
• STBY: Standby
• JAM (Blinking): Jammer Pod is
warming up
• JAMING : Jamming is active
Jamming Types
• TYPE 1: Jamming when aircraft
is radar locked by emitter
• TYPE 2: Jamming when spotted
by radar emitter
OESP Data
Jamming Direction
• FWD: Forward
• BWD: Backward
• F+B: Forward and Backward
CMBT Page 390

3
KG-600 SPJ
THUNDER
To use jammer:
1. Select CMBT (Combat) Menu
JF-17
2. Press the SPJ (Self-Protection Jammer) Power

Button.
3. A BIT (Built-In Test) will be performed during
approx. 15 sec 4
4. When BIT is complete, jammer mode will be in
STBY (Standby)
5. Select Jamming Type
6. Select Jamming Direction
7. Press the T2 Countermeasure Switch FWD (SPJ
ON) to start jamming (E binding). The blinking
JAM indication means that SPJ is warming up, and
the steady JAMING indication means the SPJ is 5
actively jamming. Press again when stop
jamming. 6
2 7a
7a 7b

• FWD: Self-Protection Jammer Toggle 391
SPJ OFF
KG-600 SPJ
THUNDER
When the SPJ pod is powered on, it can determine an approximative

slant range of radar emitters (do keep in mind that altitude
JF-17
differential has an impact on slant range).

Ship
You SA-8
Ship
As an example, the RWR display at the top has the SPJ turned OFF.
Radar emitters are placed in function of criticality (i.e. lethal vs non-
lethal).
For the same situation, the RWR display at the bottom has the SPJ
turned ON. Radar emitters are placed in function of both criticality SPJ ON
but also slant range. As we can see, this shows a clearer picture of
where radar emitters are physically in relationship to you.
392
KG-600 SPJ
THUNDER
RWR (Radar Warning Receiver) symbols with an underline represent

radar emitters being actively jammed by the SPJ (Self Protection
JF-17
Jammer).
Jammed Emitter
(underlined)
393
DATALINK & IFF INTRODUCTION
One of the biggest challenges of integrated modern warfare is the identification of contacts. As various information donors like friendly fighters, ground radar stations, AWACS (Airborne Warning and
THUNDER
Control System, like an E-3 Sentry or an E-2 Hawkeye), and ships interrogate unknown contacts with IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) systems, this information needs to be relayed to everyone within a given
Network. This is where Datalink comes in; with Link 17 Datalink (Pakistan’s own indigenous datalink system, similar to the NATO Link 16), military aircraft as well as ground forces may exchange their
JF-17
tactical picture in near-real time.
Command, Control, Communications,

Computers, Intelligence, Surveillance and
Reconnaissance (C4ISR) is a term
commonly used to describe the idea of HOSTILES
using a network to communicate and pass
data between connected assets. Link 17
incorporates high-capacity, jam-resistant,
digital communication links for exchange
of near real-time tactical information,
including both data and voice, among air
and ground elements. Such information
can consist of target aspect, target angle
off, range, closure rate and height
PART 14 – DATALINK & IFF
deviation.
FRIENDLIES
Datalink information shared

within a same network
394
DATALINK INFORMATION ON HSD
If the aircraft is connected to a datalink network, the radar scan cone and SD-10 missile range will be visible on the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display).
THUNDER
JF-17
HSD (Horizontal Situation Indicator) EVP: When boxed, displays radar scan envelope cone
ALT: When boxed, displays altitude

next to Datalink Contacts
SD-10 Missile Maximum Range Cone
GND: When boxed, displays

TRK: When boxed, displays
Ground Datalink contacts

Flight Path Track Line
RWR Threat Number Setting
Sets the number of RWR contacts
displayed on the HSD
• OPEN (All) / PRTY (Priority) REJ: When boxed, declutters
HSD symbols
UNK: When boxed, displays Unknown

Datalink Contacts
AEW: When boxed, displays

Airborne Early Warning
Datalink Contacts (AWACS)
FRD: When boxed, displays 395

Friendly Datalink Contacts
Hostile MiG-21
If you set your MMS (Master Mode Switch) UP ID: 38
THUNDER
to INTC (Intercept) and are connected to the Angle Off: 23 deg Right
correct datalink network, you will have Range: 26 nm
datalink information listed on the upper and Closure Speed: 960 kts
JF-17
lower parts of the screen. Height Deviation from you: +7000 ft

No line: target has been scanned by your radar
Hostile MiG-21
ID: 35
Hostile Ground Early Warning Radar Site Angle Off: 45 deg Right
ID: 34 Range: 21 nm
Angle Off: 35 deg Left Closure Speed: 1385 kts
Range: 26 nm Height Deviation from you: 0 ft (same altitude)
Closure Speed: 581 kts Line: target has not been scanned by your radar
Height Deviation from you: -14000 ft (at ground level)
Line: target has not been scanned by your radar
You
Hostile MiG-21 ID: 02
ID: 36
Angle Off: 21 deg Right

Range: 18 nm
Closure Speed: 1360 kts Friendly JF-17
Height Deviation from you: +1000 ft ID: 03
No line: target has been scanned by your radar Line: Has not been scanned by your radar
List of Datalink Trackfiles

(by order of threat priority)

• Green color is for friendly.
•
THUNDER
Red is for unknown or hostile.

• The inner number is the contact ID (Identification) number.
• The outer number is the contact’s altitude in thousands of feet.
JF-17
• A circle indicates a friendly information donor.

• A triangle indicates an unknown or hostile air contact.
• A “house” symbol indicates a ground contact
• A line around the symbol indicates that the contact has not been scanned by your
radar (i.e. information comes from another information donor on the network)
• The vector line indicates the direction of the contact
Hostile Air Contact

ID: 36
Altitude: 24000 ft
Contact Vector (Heading) No Line: contact has been scanned by your radar
Contact ID (03)
Hostile Ground Contact (House Symbol)

22: Target is at 22000 ft ID: 34
Altitude: 9000 ft
Line: contact has not been Line: contact has not been scanned by your radar
scanned by your radar
Hostile Air Contact
ID: 33
Altitude: 23000 ft
Line: contact has not been scanned by your radar
397
The JF-17 modelled in DCS is designed to operate using a Fighter-to-Fighter datalink information exchange model. A network is composed of a single Master (Host)
DATALINK TYPES that gathers information from all other information donors (Slave, or Client) and transmits them back to all other slaves (clients) on the same network. If you are the
THUNDER flight lead (or flying with AI aircraft), you will most likely have to be the Master in order to gain datalink information from other donors.
Slave (Client)
JF-17
Fighter-to-Fighter
Datalink
Master (Host)
However, for playability purposes a Tactical

datalink information exchange model is also
available on a given network. As an
example, an AWACS can transmit on the
network information about targets that are
way out of your radar’s range.
Slave (Client)
Keep in mind that if you are a Slave (client) and the Datalink Master is destroyed, the link between
slaves is severed and fighter-to-fighter communication will no longer be possible until a new 398
Slave (Client) Master is designated.
HOW TO SET UP DATALINK
1. On the UFCP, press RTN to go to the main menu.
THUNDER
2. Press on the Arrow Select button next to COM2 to select COM2.

3. Press on the Arrow Select button next to COM2 a second time to edit COM2 channel. 1 2
4. Enter Channel 199, then press Arrow Select button next to COM2. This channel is reserved exclusively for Datalink and must
JF-17
remain at this channel at all times.

5. Press on the Arrow Select button next to SLAV to toggle Datalink Mode to MASTER (HOST) if no Master is available on the
Network (will most likely be the case in multiplayer servers).
6. Press on the Arrow Select button next to NE- to turn on the network. NET setting will change from NE- to NES (ON).
7. Click on the CLNK OSB to select the CLINK (Datalink) page. You will see your ID, mode, Datalink setting, Channel ID and Group.
8. Your ID is already set and cannot be changed. This will be how you are displayed on other people on the network.
9. Set Datalink Network Channel ID required by your coalition (should be available in the mission briefing).
8: Your own ID
9: Channel ID
4b
4a
6 5
7 399
HOW TO SET UP DATALINK
10. You can select the GROUP menu to see who is the Master (*) and who are the slaves on the network. Flight
THUNDER
Numbers, Roles (Lead/Wingman) and Fuel State data is available for every member.
11. Press the OSB next to HSD to display the Horizontal Situation Display.
12. If you want Datalink contacts to be listed below the HSD with information about their ID, Angle Off, Range,
JF-17
Closure Speed and Height Deviation... Press T1 Master Mode Switch UP to enter INTC (Air-to-Air) Mode.
10a
12b
12a 10b
• UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) Master
11 400
IFF INTRODUCTION
Identifying what you may or may not shoot should be your primary concern at all times. This is where the IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe)
THUNDER
system comes into play.
An IFF system consists of an INTERROGATOR component and a TRANSPONDER component.

JF-17
The interrogator component broadcasts an interrogation signal with a specific “code” (pulse frequency).
A transponder equipped on another aircraft will receive the interrogation signal and broadcast a reply signal with its own “code”
(pulse frequency) as well. The information sent from this reply signal will vary based on the transponder mode selected.
Your own aircraft transponder will then see if the interrogation code and reply codes match, which in some cases can be used to
determine whether the other aircraft is a friendly contact. The nature of the information determined will vary based on the
transponder mode.
Take note that if you set an incorrect transponder code, friendly contacts may not be able to identify you as a friendly.
401
IFF MODES
In its simplest form, a "Mode" or interrogation type is generally determined by pulse spacing between two or more interrogation pulses. Various modes exist from Mode 1 to 5 for military use, to
THUNDER
Mode A, C, and Mode S for civilian use. The takeaway from this table should be:
• Mode 4 is the preferred mode in a combat scenario because it is highly secure (encrypted). Encrypted interrogation codes cannot be detected by an enemy transponder, and your transponder
JF-17
will not broadcast a reply signal to the other team.

• Mode 6 is simulated as a Mode 4, which is what we will use on the JF-17.
• Mode 4 invalid/lack of reply cannot guarantee that an aircraft is hostile, but a valid reply is a guarantee of a friendly contact (within DCS)
• Modes 1, 2, and 3 are not secure to use since any other aircraft from the opposing team could find what your Interrogator code is and set his transponder to it, fooling you into thinking he is a
friendly contact. These modes also easily give away your position since every time your transponder broadcasts an answer, this signal can be intercepted by an enemy transponder, which can
send your position to other enemy fighters via datalink.
Military Interrogation Mode Civilian Interrogation Mode Description
1 Provides 2-digit 5-bit mission code

2 Provides 4-digit octal unit code (set on ground for fighters, can be changed in flight by transport aircraft)
Provides a 4-digit octal identification code for the aircraft, set in the cockpit but assigned by the air traffic
A controller. Mode 3/A is often combined with Mode C to provide altitude information as well.
3
Provides the aircraft's pressure altitude and is usually combined with Mode 3/A to provide a combination of a 4-
C digit octal code and altitude as Mode 3 A/C, often referred to as Mode A and C
4 Provides a 3-pulse reply, delay is based on the encrypted challenge
5 Provides a cryptographically secured version of Mode S and ADS-B GPS position

Mode S (Select) is designed to help avoiding overinterrogation of the transponder (having many radars in busy
areas) and to allow automatic collision avoidance. Mode S transponders are compatible with Mode A and Mode
S C Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR) systems. This is the type of transponder that is used for TCAS or ACAS II
(Airborne Collision Avoidance System) functions
Simulated Mode created by Deka Ironwork to emulate an encrypted Mode 4 that is specific to the coalition (team)
6 in multiplayer servers. 402
THUNDER
HOW IFF WORKS WITHIN DCS
ANY JF-17 vs ANY AIRCRAFT BLUE TEAM JF-17 vs RED TEAM JF-17
JF-17
An interrogation signal of your JF-17 against any aircraft that is not a JF-17 will If JF-17s are operating for both your team and the opposing team, interrogation codes and
automatically determine if the enemy aircraft is friendly or unknown (most likely transponder codes will determine if the interrogated contact is friendly or unknown (most
enemy). The interrogation code and transponder code will not determine the nature likely enemy, or a friendly JF-17 with a malfunctioning transponder, or a friendly JF-17 with
of the contact interrogated; it will determine it based on: a transponder set on the wrong code).
• If the aircraft interrogated has his IFF transponder ON
• If the aircraft interrogated is part of the opposing team or not Interrogation & Transponder Codes DO matter in that case. These codes should be known
by all friendly JF-17 pilots on the server and mentioned in the mission briefing.
Interrogation & Transponder Codes DO NOT matter in that case.
403
THUNDER
IFF CONTROLS Real Aircraft Controls
My Controls T4 Switch
• FWD: Radio PTT (Push-to-Talk) COMM1
JF-17
• AFT: Radio PTT (Push-to-Talk) COMM2

• PRESS: IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) Interrogation Button
T4 PRESS – IFF Interrogation

404
3
IFF TUTORIAL: JF-17 vs Other Aircraft
1. Power Up IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) system by pressing
THUNDER
the IFF Button on the AAP (Avionics Activation Panel).

3. INT indicates that we are in the IFF Interrogation Menu
JF-17
(INT).
4. Press Arrow button next to the desired Interrogation
Mode. This will determine what interrogation signal we 4
send to the transponders of other aircraft. In our case,
we will choose Mode 6. 2
5. A « + » next to « M6 » will indicate Mode 6 is selected. 1
6. No Interrogation Code is required when scanning other
aircraft that are not of the JF-17 type.
7. Press on the Arrow button next to the dot to select the
IFF Transponder Menu (TRS).
8. Press Arrow button next to the desired Transponder
Mode. This will determine what response signal we send
when our own aircraft is interrogated. In our case, we
will choose Mode 6.
10. No Transponder Code is required when being

interrogated by other aircraft that are not of the JF-17
type.
7
10
6
405
T4 Switch 12a
IFF TUTORIAL: JF-17 vs Other Aircraft • FWD: Radio PTT (Push-to-Talk) COMM1 12b
11. Press the MMS (Master Mode Switch) UP to INTC (Intercept). • PRESS: IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) Interrogation Button
THUNDER
12. To interrogate, press and hold the T4 Switch in the PRESS

position (“I” binding).
13. Contacts in green will be displayed as friendly. Contacts in
JF-17
yellow indicate unknown aircraft.

11 • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
Enemy Mirage
Your aircraft Friendly Hornet
IFF Interrogating
12c
Enemy Mirage
Enemy Mirage
Enemy Mirage Friendly Hornet

406
3
IFF TUTORIAL: JF-17 vs JF-17 (MODE 3A)
1. Power Up IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) system by pressing the IFF Button on
THUNDER
the AAP (Avionics Activation Panel).

JF-17
determine what interrogation signal we send to the transponders of other
aircraft. In our case, we will choose Mode 3A.
5. A « + » next to « M3A » will indicate Mode 3A is selected. 2
4
6. An Interrogation Code is required when scanning another JF-17 type. Press
the Arrow button next to CODE. 1
7. Select code for desired mode. We will choose 1225 for Mode 3. Press arrow
button next to 0000, enter code, then press arrow button again.
8. Press BACK to return to Interrogation menu.
9. Press on the Arrow button next to the dot to select the IFF Transponder Menu
(TRS).
Interrogation Code Transponder Code
determine what response signal we send when our own aircraft is (Who are you?) (Who am I?) 10
interrogated. In our case, we will choose Mode 3A.
11. A « + » next to « M3A » will indicate Mode 3A is selected. Mode 3A Mode 3A
12. A Transponder Code is required when being interrogated by other aircraft

that are not of the JF-17 type. Press the Arrow button next to CODE. 1225 1225
13. Select code for desired mode. We will choose 1225 for Mode 3A. Press arrow
button next to 0000, enter code, then press arrow button again.
12
13
9
6 8 407
5
T4 Switch
IFF TUTORIAL: JF-17 vs JF-17 (MODE 3A) • FWD: Radio PTT (Push-to-Talk) COMM1 15b 15a
THUNDER

16. Contacts in green will be displayed as friendly. Contacts in red
JF-17
indicate aircraft who did not have the same Mode 3 transponder
code and did not respond properly.

14
Mode 3A Mode 3A • UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept)
1225 1225 • DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground)
IFF Interrogating
15b
Interrogation Signal: Who are you? Mode 3 Code 1225, by any chance?
408
IFF TUTORIAL: JF-17 vs JF-17 (MODE 3A)
No. 3 Enemy JF-17
Take note than in Mode 3, an enemy fighter who found out your interrogator code No. 1 Enemy JF-17 Good IFF Reply
THUNDER
could set his own transponder to this code, and fool you into thinking he is a friendly No IFF Reply
aircraft. Do not take Mode 3 IFF for granted.
JF-17

Mode 3A Mode 3A
1225 1225
No. 2 Friendly JF-17
Good IFF Reply
Your Aircraft
Your aircraft
Interrogator Code: Mode 3A 1225
Transponder Code: Mode 3A 1225
No. 1 Enemy JF-17

Displayed Red because its transponder is set to the wrong code
Interrogation Signal: Who are you?

Mode 3 Code 1225, by any chance? No. 2 Friendly JF-17
Displayed Friendly because its transponder is set to the correct code
No. 3 Enemy JF-17

Displayed Friendly because its transponder is set to the correct code. Sneaky little bugger! 409
3
IFF TUTORIAL: JF-17 vs JF-17 (MODE 6)
1. Power Up IFF (Identify-Friend-or-Foe) system by pressing the IFF Button on
THUNDER
the AAP (Avionics Activation Panel).

JF-17
determine what interrogation signal we send to the transponders of other 4
aircraft. In our case, we will choose Mode 6. 2
6. An Interrogation Code is required when scanning another JF-17 type. Press
the Arrow button next to CODE. 1
7. Select code for desired mode. We will choose A for Mode 6.
8. Press BACK to return to Interrogation menu.
9. Press on the Arrow button next to the dot to select the IFF Transponder
Menu (TRS).
determine what response signal we send when our own aircraft is Interrogation Code Transponder Code 10
interrogated. In our case, we will choose Mode 6.
11. A « + » next to « M6 » will indicate Mode 6 is selected. (Who are you?) (Who am I?)
12. A Transponder Code is required when being interrogated by other aircraft
Mode 6 Mode 6
that are not of the JF-17 type. Press the Arrow button next to CODE.
13. Select code for desired mode. We will choose A for Mode 6.
14. Select IP+ option if desired. It will swap A and B encryption keys interleavely A A
to allow other Mode 6 interrogators with A key to recognize you if you have
your B key on. 12
13
5 7 14
8
6 410
T4 Switch
IFF TUTORIAL: JF-17 vs JF-17 (MODE 6) • FWD: Radio PTT (Push-to-Talk) COMM1 16b
16a
THUNDER

17. Contacts in green will be displayed as friendly. Contacts in
JF-17
yellow indicate unknown aircraft.

Interrogation Code Transponder Code 15
Mode 6 Mode 6
A A
IFF Interrogating
16b
Interrogation Signal: Who are you? Mode 6 A, by any chance?
411
THUNDER
IFF TUTORIAL: JF-17 vs JF-17 (MODE 6)

(Unknown)
JF-17
Interrogation Code Transponder Code No. 3 Enemy JF-17

(Who are you?) (Who am I?) (Unknown)
Mode 6 Mode 6
A A
(Friendly)
Your Aircraft
Your aircraft
Interrogator Code: Mode 6 A
Transponder Code: Mode 6 A

Transponder Code: Mode 6 B
Displayed Unknown because its transponder is set to the wrong code
Interrogation Signal: Who are

you? Mode 6 A, by any chance? No. 2 Friendly JF-17
Displayed Friendly because its transponder is set to the correct code
and it could decrypt your interrogation signal (same coalition)
No. 3 Enemy JF-17

Displayed Unknown because it could not decrypt your interrogation signal 412
IN CONCLUSION
The moral of the story is that Datalink and IFF are meant to be used together in order to complement the information gathered by your radar, radar warning receiver and other datalink
THUNDER
information donors. This minimizes the chances of friendly fire.

JF-17
413
R&S M3AR V/UHF RADIO
T4 Switch
The JF-17 uses a R&S M3AR VHF/UHF radio. • FWD: Radio PTT (Push-to-Talk) COMM1
THUNDER
• RALT+\
• COM1 covers the VHF band (108.000 – 173.975 MHz) and is used for • AFT: Radio PTT (Push-to-Talk) COMM2
primary voice communications. • RCTRL+\
JF-17
• COM2 covers the UHF band (225.000 – 399.975 MHz) and is used as
a backup for voice communications. COM2 is also used for Datalink,
which uses the dedicated Preset Channel 199.
• Radio transmission is done with the T4 Radio Push-to-Talk switch
FWD (COM1 VHF, “RALT+\”) or AFT (COM2 UHF, “RCTRL+\”)
The UFCP panel is used to tune radios rapidly using preset frequencies in
either VHF or UHF frequencies. The Main UFCP Menu appears when
pressing the RTN button on the UFCP. 200 Preset Channels are available.
The Communications Panel, on the other hand, can be used for all radio
functions. This includes selecting preset channels, seeing the frequency
preset channels, changing radio transmission power, and modifying the
frequency of a preset channel.
PART 15 – RADIO TUTORIAL
Communications Panel
UFCP (Up-Front Control Panel) 414

UFCP PANEL
The Main UFCP (Up-Front Control Panel) Menu appears when pressing the RTN button on the UFCP.
THUNDER
Guard Frequency
• EMG: Emergency
COM1 Menu • UHF
JF-17
• VHF
• 243
Radio Modulation (Encryption)

PLN: Plain
CMS: Not Simulated
TRS: Not Simulated
Radio Mode Selector SQ+: Squelch ON

RT: Transmit-Receive SQ-: Squelch OFF
RT+G: Transmit-Receive + Guard
Encrypted Radio Mode
• SLAV: Slave Mode
Encrypted Radio Network • MAST: Master Mode

• NE - : OFF Not simulated.
• NES: ON
Not simulated.
Changes COM1 Preset Returns to previous

Channel Selected COM1 Preset Main UFCP Menu
COM1 and COM2 Preset Channel Selected
Channels Selected Selects COM2 Menu
RTN Button Selects COM1 Menu
415
THUNDER
COMMUNICATIONS PANEL
Radio Volume Knob

Radio Squelch Switch Radio Modulation Mode (P = Plain)
JF-17
• OFF
• SQL (Squelch)
• ACKN (Acknowledge) Radio Channel Selected
Radio AM/FM Band Selected
Radio Keys
R&S M3AR Radio Mode Switch

• ZRO: Function Not Available.
• OFF
• TR: Transmit-Receive
• TR+G: Transmit-Receive + Guard Frequency
• ADF: Automatic Directional Finder (Function Not
Available)
• GD: Emergency Guard Frequency (243.000 MHz
UHF / 121.500 MHz VHF) Radio Signal
• SET: can be used to initiate the Built-In Test (BIT),
Power Arrow
change the preset set, view/change the preset
assignment and view/change the general setting.
Radio Control Handover Switch
Radio Control Handover ON LED Light
416
5b
R&S M3AR V/UHF RADIO
TUTORIAL 1
THUNDER
4
Use Preset Channel with UFCP Panel
JF-17
1. Consult PRESET CHANNEL FREQ table using the kneeboard.

Use “RSHIFT+K” to display kneeboard, then use “[“ and “]”
to turn pages.
2. We will use COM1 VHF Channel 030 (122.500 MHz). 5a 6a
3. Make sure Radio Mode Selector is set to TR (Transmit-
Receive) 6b
4. On UFCP, press RTN button to display Main UFCP menu.
5. Press on Arrow button next to COM1. Display will show
current Squelch and Network parameters on current
preset channel.
6. Press on Arrow button next to COM1 again to enter EDIT
mode. 7a
7. Enter desired Preset Channel on keypad (030 will select 7b
Channel 30). Press on Arrow button next to COM1 to
confirm the Edit.

8. To transmit on COM1, press the T4 Radio Push-to-Talk
button FWD (“RALT + \” binding).
3 2 417
Radio Control
R&S M3AR V/UHF RADIO Handover LED ON
TUTORIAL 2
THUNDER
Use Preset Channel with Communication Panel

JF-17
3b
2
1. Make sure Radio Mode Selector is set to TR (Transmit-Receive)
2. Press on the Radio Control Handover button. Confirm that 3a
corresponding yellow LED light illuminates. This will take control away
from the UFCP and let you use the Communication Panel.
3. Select Preset Mode: Click PRE (0), then P (7) for Plain Modulation
Mode.
4. Change Preset Channel Number: Type on keypad the desired preset
channel number (i.e. 40), then press ENT. 4b
5. Check current frequency of preset channel: Press ENT, then + (3).
Frequency will be displayed for the selected preset channel (127.500).
Press + (3) again to return to previous display.
6. To transmit on COM1, press the T4 Radio Push-to-Talk button FWD
(“RALT + \” binding). 4a
5a
6
5b
1 418
Radio Control
TUTORIAL 3
THUNDER
Edit Preset Channel with Communication Panel

JF-17
3b
2
corresponding yellow LED light illuminates. This will take control away
from the UFCP and let you use the Communication Panel.
3. Select Preset Mode: Click PRE (0), then P (7) for Plain Modulation 6
Mode.
4. Change Preset Channel Number: Type on keypad the desired preset
channel number (i.e. 40), then press ENT. 4b 5
5. Set Radio Mode Selector to SET
6. Display should show the current frequency of the Preset Channel
(127.500)
7. Press ENT, type the new frequency (126.75), then press ENT again.
Channel 40 is now set to 126.750 MHz. 4a
8. Set Radio Mode Selector to TR (Transmit-Receive)
9. To transmit on COM1, press the T4 Radio Push-to-Talk button FWD 7b

(“RALT + \” binding).
7a 7c
1 8
419
Radio Control
TUTORIAL 4
THUNDER
Manual Frequency with Communication Panel

JF-17
2
corresponding yellow LED light illuminates. This will take control
away from the UFCP and let you use the Communication Panel.
3. Select MANUAL Mode: Click MAN, then P (7) for Plain Modulation
Mode.
4. Type the new frequency (119.000), then press ENT. Manual
frequency is now updated.
5. To transmit on COM1, press the T4 Radio Push-to-Talk button FWD
4b
(“RALT + \” binding).
3b
4a
1 420
FCS (FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM)
The JF-17 has a Fly-By-Wire system, which replaces conventional manual flight controls of an aircraft with an electronic interface. The FCS (Flight
THUNDER
Control System) has a certain level of control over pitch, roll and yaw control inputs. The lateral and directional control system is a mix of mechanical
control system and authority limited electrical CAS/SAS. Lateral CAS receives digital roll rate command from the stick, and uses roll rate feedback to
JF-17
provide dampening and roll rate control.
In the Pitch Axis:

• The FCS will automatically trim the aircraft, adjust leading
edge flaps to achieve the best lift-to-drag ratio,
automatically limit G loading and angle of attack to avoid
structural damage or aircraft stall.
• At high speed, the stick controls the aircraft’s vertical G.
• At low speed, the stick controls the aircraft’s pitch rate.
• At high angle of attack, the aircraft forces the nose down
to remain within AoA limits.
• After the landing gear is retracted, the FCS will maintain
positive speed stability.
• If aircraft enters a spin, the DIRECT LINK mode switch
PART 16 – FCS & AUTOPILOT
must be engaged to automatically exit the spin. However,

if the aircraft within AoA limits, this function will not work.
• There is an automatic takeoff trim function. It actives
when wheel speed exceeds 41 kts and starts deflecting
the horizontal stabilizer to 8 deg of deflection angle when
reaching 108 kts.
In the Roll and Yaw Axis:

• Control augmentation system will ensure adequate flight
control performance, but roll and yaw control systems are
not fly-by-wire. This means you will have to keep
adjusting your roll and yaw with the stick and rudder
throughout the flight.
421
Flight Control System faults and malfunctions can be monitored in the DATA – FCS sub-page. These faults are monitored for A, B, C and D individual FCS channels. A solid “P” circle will indicate that the
THUNDER
automatic takeoff trim system is pulling up the aircraft. A solid “DL” circle indicates the Direct Link FCS mode is active.
JF-17
From the FCS page, you can also check flight control position on the DATA – FCS – SPCHK sub-page.
Automatic Takeoff Direct Link Mode Status Access SPCHK Page

Trim System Status Shown: Inactive FCS Configuration Mode
Shown: Active
Flight Control Surface Diagram

FCS Channels
FCS Faults
Pitch Stick Axis
Roll Stick Axis
Rudder Yaw Axis
DATA – FCS Page DATA – FCS – SPCHK Page
422
FCS CONFIGURATION MODES

THUNDER
The Flight Control System can use three configuration modes: AA, AG1 and AG2. Depending on the weapon
JF-17
and external fuel tank loadout, the aircraft will automatically detect what CONFIG setting you should be in.
The CONFIG warning indicates that the FCS Configuration Mode switches are not set properly. The selected
CONFIG setting is indicated on the Status Light panel.
• AA: Air-to-Air configuration. FCS will limit aircraft G to 8 G.
• AG1: Air-to-Ground configuration 1, used when air-to-ground weapons are mounted

and no external wing-mounted fuel tanks are mounted. AG1 G limit is 6g.
• AG2: Air-to-Ground configuration 2, used when air-to-ground weapons are mounted

and external wing-mounted fuel tanks are mounted. AG2 G limit is 5g.
Be careful: Some munitions like the C-701 TV missile have a structural limit of 5.5g and the FCS config will still
recommend AG1.
AG1/AG2 Flight Control System Configuration Mode Switch

• AG1: Air-to-Ground Configuration 1
AA/AG (Air-to-Air/Air-to-
• AG2: Air-to-Ground Configuration 2 Ground) Flight Control System
Configuration Mode Switch
423
AUTOPILOT
The JF-17 has a number of autopilot “relief modes” that assist the pilot in flying
THUNDER
the aircraft.
JF-17
AUTOPILOT MODES
1. ATT: Attitude Hold. Aircraft will maintain the existing pitch and roll
attitude in pitch and +/- 70 degrees in roll.
2. ALT: Barometric Altitude Hold. When engaged, aircraft will maintain

current barometric altitude when ALT mode is selected; altitude hold
target will be displayed on the UFCP (0500 = 5000 ft)
3. ALT (SEL): Barometric Altitude Select. If Altitude Hold is engaged,

you can press on the arrow next to the altitude value and edit it on
the UFCP keypad. Once new target altitude is saved, autopilot will
climb or descend to this altitude.
4. HEADING HOLD: If any autopilot mode is engaged and your bank

angle is less than 7 degrees, the aircraft will attempt to maintain its
current heading. This mode is implicit and is not displayed on the
UFCP.
424
AUTOPILOT
ATTITUDE HOLD PROCEDURE

THUNDER
JF-17
1. Set aircraft in desired attitude

2. Press the A/P button on the UFCP to power on the
Autopilot.
3. When autopilot is powered on, ATT (Attitude Hold)
mode will be ON by default and autopilot will
maintain current attitude.
4. If bank angle is less than 7 deg, the aircraft will also
automatically hold its current heading.
5. To disengage autopilot, press the S7 (Autopilot
Disengage) Button.
5 S7: Autopilot Disengage Switch

2
3
425
AUTOPILOT
ALTITUDE SELECT PROCEDURE

THUNDER
JF-17
1. Set aircraft in desired attitude

2. Press the A/P button on the UFCP to power on the Autopilot. 3
3. When autopilot is powered on, ATT (Attitude Hold) mode will be ON by default and
autopilot will maintain current attitude. 7a
4. Press on the Arrow button next to Autopilot mode (ATT) data field. This will set ALT 3
(Altitude Hold) mode.
5. Autopilot will maintain current altitude, which will be displayed next to ALT (0500 = 5000
ft).
6. If bank angle is less than 7 deg, the aircraft will also automatically hold its current
heading.
7. To set a new target altitude:
a) Press on the arrow button right of the altitude value data field to edit the field
b) Enter the new altitude value on the UFCP keypad (0600 will input 6000 ft)
c) Press on the arrow button right of the altitude value data field again.
8. Autopilot will automatically pitch up to reach the new target altitude. Once target
altitude is reached, aircraft will level off and maintain target altitude (6000 ft). 8
9. To disengage autopilot, press the S7 (Autopilot Disengage) Button.
5
9
S7: Autopilot Disengage Switch
4
7b 426 7c
JF-17
PART 17 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING THUNDER
427
NAVIGATION INTRODUCTION
Navigation in the JF-17 is mostly done through the HSD (Horizontal Situation Display), which is a top-down view that displays your heading and navigation aids such as TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation)
THUNDER
beacons and waypoints entered before flight in the mission editor. The HUD (Heads-Up Display) also displays various steering cues. The EFIS (Electronic Flight Instrument System) page can also be
used to consult steering cues for ILS landings.
JF-17
HUD (Heads-Up Display)

PART 17 – NAVIGATION & ILS LANDING
EFIS (Electronic Flight

Instrument System) Page
HSD (Horizontal Situation

Display) Page and Digital Map
428
DIGITAL MAP
In order to display the digital map, select the
THUNDER
MAP option (boxed when selected).
Map Scale Increase

JF-17
You can set the desired map type in the Special

Options (see Kits & Options section).
Map Scale
(240/120/60/30/9)
Map Scale Decrease
MAP Option
429
Distance to Selected TRU (True Heading) / MAG
HSD (HORIZONTAL SITUATION DISPLAY) Waypoint (nm)
Aircraft Heading (Magnetic Heading) Selector
Setting the MMS (Master Mode Switch) in the MIDDLE position Heading Scale
THUNDER
(NAV) will automatically display the AFD (Airfield Data) sub-page,

which lists the closest airports. Map Scale Increase
JF-17
Bearing to Selected Waypoint

Selected Map Scale
RWR Threat Number Setting Waypoint (240/120/60/30/9)
Sets the number of RWR contacts
displayed on the HSD Map Scale Decrease
• OPEN (All) / PRTY (Priority)

Flight Plan
West / South / East / MAP Option

North Reference Marks
TCN: TACAN Data

Aircraft Position Display Toggle
AFD (Airfield Data) Sub-Page

(List of Closest Airports)
• No.: Airport Number
• DIS: Distance to Airport (nm)
• BRG: Bearing to Airport
T1: MMS (Master Mode Switch) • ALT: Airport Elevation (ft)
• UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) • ILS: Instrument Landing System
• MIDDLE: NAV (Navigation) Availability (Y = YES)
• DOWN: AG (Air-to-Ground) • TCN: TACAN Availability (Y = YES)
HSD Quick Select OSB 430

HSD (HORIZONTAL SITUATION DISPLAY)
If the HSD MFCD is set as the SOI (Sensor of Interest) with the S1
THUNDER
Sensor Select Switch pressed in the direction of the HSD display,

using S2 Sensor Control Switch FWD increases the Map Scale
JF-17
range, while using S2 Sensor Control Switch AFT decreases the

Map Scale range.
S2: SC (Sensor Control) Switch Map Scale

(240/120/60/30/9)
MFCD SOI Asterisk

S1: SS (Sensor Selection) Switch 431
HNS (HYBRID NAVIGATION SYSTEM)
HNS (Hybrid Navigation System) combines GPS (Global Positioning System, which relies on satellites) and INS (Inertial Navigation System) data together to compute the aircraft’s position. The HNS
THUNDER
status menu is accessible by pressing the HNS Menu button on the UFCP.
JF-17
During normal operation, the combined GPS + INS mode is recommended to increase your position precision. If GPS becomes unavailable or malfunctions, the “INS ONLY” mode can be used as a
backup. However, Inertial Navigation Systems accumulate drift over time and decreases position precision as time increases and aircraft manoeuvers.
HNS combined
INS Only Mode
INS & GPS Mode
(HNS disabled)
HNS Menu Button
Toggles INS + GPS

and INS ONLY
432
DEST WAYPOINT NAVIGATION INTRODUCTION
Your waypoints are known as DEST (Destination) Points. They are usually already set up with the mission editor, but you
THUNDER
can manually edit them. Waypoints are set up as a “flight plan sequence” and numbered 1, 2, 3… for a maximum of 59
waypoints. You can have up to two different sequences of waypoints (FP-A for Flight Plan A, FP-B for Flight Plan B). 30 to 35 Waypoints reserved for CM-802AKG and C-
JF-17

Certain Waypoint numbers have a specific use (see DEST Waypoint Database table). For instance, Waypoints 30 to 35 are
reserved for cruise missile route points (RP), Waypoints 36 to 39 are reserved for GPS-guided bomb Pre-Planned Points 36 to 39 Waypoints reserved for LS-6/GB-6 bomb
(PP). (PP1 to PP4) targets (Pre-Planned Points)
The DEST (Destination) menu (which is accessible through MFCD menus or through the UFCP) allows you to consult, create 40 SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Coordinates
or edit waypoint data.

DST (Destination) Menu Button
CPY: Copies selected
Flight Plan Selected waypoint data CLR: Clears selected
waypoint data
DEST Waypoint Selected in page
DEST Waypoint Coordinates
DEST Waypoint Coordinates

STEP (steps through
waypoints) DEST Waypoint Elevation (ft)
BACK (steps back

through waypoints)
Waypoint Data
Selected DEST Waypoint

433
The Main UFCP Menu allows you to select what waypoint to track.
THUNDER
JF-17
A09: Flight Plan A

Waypoint 9 Tracked
Waypoint 9 Tracked
Waypoint 9 Tracked
Press RTN to access 434

Main UFCP Menu
Here is an example of a flight plan already set up in the mission editor. Note the NAVIGATION TARGET POINTS tab that allows you to place different waypoint types (PP# for Pre-Planned Points, RP#
THUNDER
for Route Points).
Navigation Target
JF-17
Route Points Points Tab

Pre-Planned Points
Waypoints
435
NAVIGATING TO A WAYPOINT
3
1. Set MMS (Master Mode Switch) to MIDDLE (NAV)
THUNDER
2. Press on RTN button to access the MAIN UFCP menu

3. To select Waypoint 2, press arrow button next to
JF-17
Waypoint Data Field. You will enter Edit Mode.

4. Press “02” on keypad, then press arrow button next to
Waypoint Data Field to enter new waypoint.
Note: alternatively, you could press the arrow next to

the Waypoint Data Field, then use the UFCP Fast Select 2
Rocker Switch to switch between waypoints.
4b
4a
1 UFCP +/./- Fast Select Rocker Switch

Used to increase/decrease value selected in Data Display Fields. Short click
increases/decreases by one, holding click continuously increases/decreases value.
Right Click: UP (+)
Left Click: DOWN (-) 436
Switch springs back to Middle (.) position
5. Steer towards the waypoint by following the Navigation Tadpole and Selected Heading Caret. In
THUNDER
the picture below, we need to steer left.

Waypoint Altitude
JF-17
Airspeed Expected at
Waypoint
ETA: Estimated Time

Waypoint Distance Indicator
to Arrival at Waypoint
Waypoint Steering Cue (Tadpole)
Waypoint Selected Heading Caret Current Heading

Distance to Selected Waypoint
Airspeed Expected at Bearing to Selected Waypoint

Waypoint Caret (350 kts)
Waypoint 2 Selected
Aircraft Position

time to Waypoint and current time

02: Waypoint Number Selected
Waypoint Altitude Caret (waypoint is set on 8.1: Distance to Waypoint (nm)
ground in our case and will be set to 59 ft) Waypoint Selected Heading Caret 437
6. Once Navigation Tadpole is vertical and centered, you are on course towards the waypoint. The Selected Heading Caret should be lined up on your current heading.
THUNDER
JF-17
Waypoint Selected Heading Caret

Current Heading
Current Heading Waypoint Selected Heading Caret
Waypoint Steering Cue (Tadpole)
Waypoint Distance Indicator
Aircraft Position
Waypoint 2 Selected
Waypoint Symbol
438
WAYPOINT AUTO-UPDATE
The Waypoint Auto-Update system will automatically switch to the next waypoint when the aircraft is less than 2 nm from the selected waypoint. This allows you to minimize your workload.
THUNDER
However, you can disable this function by setting the Waypoint Update Setting to MANUAL. Manual mode is useful when you need to overfly a waypoint multiple times for close air support.
JF-17
The Waypoint Update Setting is available in the MAIN UFCP Menu. You can access it by pressing the RTN button.
Waypoint Update Setting - AUTO: Toggles Waypoint

switching automatically to the next waypoint when aircraft Waypoint Update Setting - MANUAL : Waypoints need to
is less than 2 nm from selected waypoint be updated manually. Auto-Update function is disabled.
RTN button displays the

MAIN UFCP Menu
439
CREATING WAYPOINTS VIA DTC (DATA TRANSFER CARTRIDGE)
If you play in multiplayer and don’t feel like adding the waypoint coordinates every time, there is a way to create a new mission data cartridge with waypoints created by using the F10 map.
THUNDER
1. Make sure your aircraft’s data cartridge is removed

JF-17
2. Press F10 to display the map, then select the MARK LABEL button
3. Click where you want to create a waypoint, then type “WPT” followed by the waypoint number you want to create. “WPT3” would be “Navigation Waypoint 3”. For a Route Point point, type “RP”
followed by the route point number you want to create. “RP2” would be “Route Point 2”. For a Pre-Planned Point, type “PP” followed by the pre-planned point number you want to create. “PP1”
would be “Pre-Planned Point 1”.
Route Points
Pre-Planned Points
Waypoints
440
CREATING WAYPOINTS VIA DTC (DATA TRANSFER CARTRIDGE) 4b
4. Load DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) into the aircraft. The DTC is used to transfer weapon
data, navigation data, approach data and electronic warfare system data to the airplane. 4e
THUNDER
Waypoints and Marked points on the F10 map (i.e. RP1, RP2… RP6 Route Points for
JF-17
a) Make sure DC Power is available (engine is started and DC GEN switch is ON) and
DTC card is unmounted.
b) Contact ground crew and request a DTC Data Update by pressing « \ », then
pressing F8 (Ground Crew), F5 (Update DTC Data), then F1 (Update Data).
c) Once DTC is updated, click twice on the DTC slot to insert the cartridge.
d) Once DTC is inserted, left MFCD will automatically display to the DATA – DTC
Sub-page with the « DTC LOCKED » message. 4d
e) Press OSB (Option Select Button) next to « ALL » to select all data fields to be
updated (boxed when selected).
4b
4c Click a second
time to insert DTC 4c DTC Inserted
4b
4b
441
4. Load DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) into the aircraft.
f) Press OSB (Option Select Button) next to « ENT » (Enter) to transfer data.
THUNDER
g) « DTC TRANS » message will indicate information transfer is in progress.

h) « DTC LOCKED » message and unboxed data fields will indicate that the information
JF-17
transfer is complete.
4g
4h
4f
442
5. Your navigation plan, waypoints, route points, and pre-planned points
will then be loaded. You can check on the HSD and DST (Destination)
THUNDER
page to see if the coordinates have been updated properly. Take note
that Route Points will be set in DEST waypoints 30 to 35 (RP1 to RP6),
JF-17
and that Pre-Planned Points will be set in DEST waypoints 36 to 39

(PP1 to PP4).
DTC Loading
In Progress
DEST Page
No HSD Data
Navigation Waypoints
DTC Loading
Complete
Route Points
Pre-Planned Points HSD Data Loaded
443
CREATING WAYPOINTS VIA DST (DESTINATION) MENU
To create a new waypoint via the DST (Destination) menu:
THUNDER
1
1. Press on the ”DST” (Destination) button on the UFCP. It
JF-17
will display the DST Menu on the left MFCD.

2. Press the OSB next to STEP to select an empty Waypoint
(i.e Waypoint 05 in our case).
Alternatively, you could also select Waypoint 05 by
pressing on the arrow next to the Waypoint number,
entering « 05 » on the UFCP keypad, then pressing the
arrow again.
3. The blinking DST 05 indication on the UFCP means no
valid coordinates are entered yet.
4. Here are the coordinates of the new waypoint 05:
444
CREATING WAYPOINTS VIA DST (DESTINATION) MENU
5c
5. Enter Latitude:
THUNDER
5a 5b
a) Press arrow left of Latitude Data Field to select Latitude
coordinates
JF-17
b) Enter Latitude coordinates on the UFCP keypad: “4209477”

for 42°09’47.7’’ North.
c) Press arrow left of Latitude Data Field to enter Latitude
coordinates
d) Press arrow right of Latitude Data Field to select
North/South
6. Enter Longitude:
a) Press arrow left of Longitude Data Field to select Longitude
coordinates
b) Enter Longitude coordinates on the UFCP keypad: 5d
“04200351” for 042°00’35.1’’ East. 6a
c) Press arrow left of Longitude Data Field to enter Longitude
coordinates
d) Press arrow right of Latitude Data Field to select East/West
7. Enter Altitude:
a) Press arrow right of Altitude Data Field to select Altitude
b) Enter Altitude on the UFCP keypad: “05000” for 5000 ft.
6c
c) Press arrow right of Altitude Data Field to enter Altitude
d) Press arrow left of Altitude Data Field to select either + or – 6b
as required
6d
7a
Waypoint 05 Coordinates:
• LATITUDE : 42°09’47.7’’ North (deg, min, sec) 7b
7c
7d
445
CREATING WAYPOINTS VIA DST (DESTINATION) MENU Waypoint 05 Coordinates:
8. And that’s it! Once all data fields have been properly set on the UFCP, Waypoint 05 will automatically update • LONGITUDE: 042°00’35.1’’ East (deg, min, sec)
THUNDER
itself to the coordinates you just entered. • ALTITUDE: 05000 (ft)

JF-17
446
1
HOW TO EDIT WAYPOINTS
To create a new waypoint via the DST (Destination) menu:
THUNDER
2a
1. Press on the ”DST” (Destination) button on the UFCP. It will display the DST Menu on the
JF-17
left MFCD.
2. Press the OSB next to STEP to select the Waypoint you want to edit (i.e Waypoint 05).
Alternatively, you could also select Waypoint 05 by pressing on the arrow next to the
Waypoint number, entering « 05 » on the UFCP keypad, then pressing the arrow again.
3. Here are the current coordinates of waypoint 05:
2b
4. We want to change the waypoint latitude. The new coordinates of waypoint 05 are:
• LONGITUDE: 042°00’35.1’’ East (deg, min, sec) 5d
• ALTITUDE: 05000 (ft) 5c
5. Edit Latitude:
a) Press arrow left of Latitude Data Field to select Latitude coordinates
b) Enter new Latitude coordinates on the UFCP keypad: “4210502” for 42°10’50.2’’
North.
c) Press arrow left of Latitude Data Field to enter Latitude coordinates
d) Press arrow right of Latitude Data Field to select North/South
5b 5a
6. And that’s it! Waypoint 05 will automatically update itself to the new coordinates you
just entered.
447
HOW TO COPY, PASTE & CLEAR WAYPOINTS
COPY-PASTE WAYPOINT
THUNDER
1. Press on the ”DST” (Destination) button on the UFCP. It

5
JF-17
2. Press the OSB next to STEP to select the waypoint you

3
want to copy. We will take Waypoint 05.
3. Press the OSB next to CPY (Copy).
4. Press the OSB next to STEP to select the waypoint you
want to paste this data to. We will take Waypoint 07.
5. Press the OSB next to PST (Paste).
6. Waypoint 07 will now have the same coordinates and

altitude as Waypoint 05.
2
CLEAR WAYPOINT
a) Press on the ”DST” (Destination) button on the UFCP. It
4
b) Press the OSB next to STEP to select the waypoint you
want to clear. We will take Waypoint 07.
c) Press the OSB next to CLR (Clear).
d) Waypoint 07 is now deleted.
1
b
d
a
448
MARKPOINTS – OVFLY MODE
You can also designate a markpoint using the OFLY (Overfly) mode. Basically, when you press the MRK button, the
THUNDER
aircraft will remember its current position and create a markpoint automatically.
JF-17
1. Press MRK (Markpoint) button on the UFCP.

2. OFLY-41 means the Markpoint Set mode is set to Overfly and Markpoint will be created on DST Waypoint 41.
3. Fly over the area you want to place a markpoint on.
4. When over the desired markpoint area, press MRK (Markpoint) Button on the UFCP to create markpoint 41.
5. You can check on the DST page the new coordinates created.
4a
Take note that markpoint altitude recorded with OFLY mode will be your aircraft altitude at the time the MRK button
was pressed. You can edit your markpoint altitude to set target elevation if you want to use this point later on; see
« How to Edit Waypoints » tutorial. Alternatively, you can use the Markpoint DSG (Designate) mode to have the correct
target elevation straight away.

(RP1 to RP6) 802AK missile steerpoints (Route Points) 4b

(PP1 to PP4) targets (Pre-Planned Points) 2
4c
59 Reserved waypoint for airfield (editable) 449
MARKPOINTS – DSG MODE
You can also designate a markpoint using any of your sensors 01 to 29 Waypoints reserved for navigation
THUNDER
(air-to-ground radar, air-to-sea radar, targeting pod, HUD).

JF-17
1. MMS (Master Mode Switch) – AG (RP1 to RP6) 802AK missile steerpoints (Route Points)
2. Designate a SPI (Sensor Point of Interest). For example, 2
you can use the targeting pod, then use T5-TDC PRESS to 36 to 39 Waypoints reserved for LS-6/GB-6 bomb
designate the SPI. (PP1 to PP4) targets (Pre-Planned Points)
3. If designated properly, DST Waypoint 40 will display the
SPI coordinates. 40 SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Coordinates
4. Press MRK (Markpoint) button on the UFCP. 41 to 49 Reserved for Markpoints

5. OFLY-44 means the Markpoint Set mode is set to Overfly
and Markpoint will be created on DST Waypoint 44. 50 to 58 Reserved waypoints for airfields closest to
6. Press on the left arrow button next to OFLY to change last navigation waypoint (non-editable)
Markpoint Set mode to DSG (Designate).
7. Press MRK (Markpoint) Button on the UFCP to create 59 Reserved waypoint for airfield (editable)
markpoint 44.
7c
6
7a
7b
450
TACAN
TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation) stations are navigation aids typically used by the military and provide you directional and distance guidance. They can be installed on airdromes, air refueling
THUNDER
tankers or even aircraft carriers like the CVN-74 John Stennis (74-X frequency typically).
JF-17
1. Determine the TACAN frequency you want to track by opening the map with F10 and by clicking on the airport you want to track. The frequency of the TACAN beacon for Al Minhad is 99X
(MIN). We intend to intercept this TACAN a radial/course of 090.
You
MIN TACAN Beacon 451

4b
TACAN 5
2. Select MAIN MENU page 3a

THUNDER
3. Press on the OSB next to « TACAN ».

4. Press on the OSB next to MODE to set
JF-17
A/G Mode for ground TACAN stations.

5. Press on the OSB next to CHANNEL and
set TACAN station (099 for TACAN station
99X)
6. Press on the OSB next to COURSE and set 4a
desired course to TACAN (090).
7. If required, press on the OSB next to

BAND to set « X » for TACAN 99X.
8. If required, press on the OSB next to ALT
to set TACAN altitude. We will set it to
the station’s elevation (00190 for 190 ft).
9. Press OSB next to VAR to set TACAN
station’s Magnetic Variation. For the
Persian Gulf theater, we will use 1.6 deg
East, rounded up to 2 deg East. 7
8
Magnetic Variation:
Caucasus = approx +6° (East)
Nevada = approx +12° (East)
Normandy = approx +8 ° (East)
Persian Gulf = approx +1.6° (East)
9b 452
9a
TACAN Bearing
TACAN Arrow: FROM
10. On the HSD (Horizontal Situation Indicator), press the

THUNDER
OSB next to TACAN (boxed when selected). This will

display distance, bearing and course to TACAN station.
JF-17
11. Steer the aircraft to set the TACAN Bearing Arrow on the TACAN Course
HUD at the “0 deviation” position. Deviation Symbol
TACAN Course Deviation

Reference (8 deg deviation)
TACAN Course Deviation 11a

Reference (4 deg deviation) Heading 137
TACAN course is more than 8 deg right
Aircraft Heading
TACAN Bearing
Arrow: TO
11a 11b
TACAN Course Aircraft Symbol

Deviation Symbol
11b
TACAN Course Line
11b Distance from TACAN (nm)

Heading 089 Bearing to TACAN
TACAN course line is 8 deg left TACAN TCRS (True Course)
453
TACAN
11. Steer the aircraft to set the TACAN Bearing Arrow on the
THUNDER
HUD at the “0 deviation” position.

TACAN Bearing TACAN
JF-17
Arrow: TO
TACAN Course Deviation Deviation: 2 deg left
11c

TACAN Bearing 11c
Arrow: TO Heading 090
Deviation: 0 deg TACAN course is 2 deg left
11d TACAN Course Deviation


11d
11c
TACAN
11d
Heading 090 454
TACAN course line is right on course 090
TACAN TACAN Program Selector OSB
Note 1:
THUNDER
TACAN function will not work while datalink is active. Weird? Yes indeed!
JF-17
Note 2:
TACAN Programs can be selected with the OSB next to TCN 01 (or selected TACAN program number).
There are a total of 10 programs, which are loaded via the Data Transfer Cartridge.
TACAN Program already has

the correct Magnetic Variation.
06 East is set for Caucasus.
455
TACAN
Note 3:
THUNDER
If you select APR (Approach) Mode from the UFCP and choose an airport that has a TACAN
available, you can automatically select this station.
JF-17
1. Press RTN to access UFCP MAIN Menu

2. Press Arrow next to FP-A
3. Select APR (Approach) Mode
4. Select desired airport (i.e. Airport 50)
5. Press Arrow next to ILS to toggle between ILS, SCA and TACAN until you have TCN
selected.
6. TACAN station on airport 50 will automatically be selected and steering cues will be
visible on the HUD.
7. From the APR page, you can also set the desired course to TACAN.
2
1
7
3
456
AFD (Airfield Data)
The DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) has 9 Waypoints (DST 50 to 58) reserved for the closest airports to the last waypoint of your flight plan.
THUNDER
Think of them as alternate airports available for landing. These waypoints are entered in the DTC automatically by the ground crew and cannot
be edited. This list of airports is available on the AFD (Airfield Data) sub-page.
JF-17
Setting the MMS (Master Mode Switch) in the MIDDLE position (NAV) will automatically display the AFD (Airfield Data) sub-page, which lists Airport/Waypoint 51
the closest airports.
Open your kneeboard (RSHIFT+K) to the NAV & APPROACH page to see what Airport Number corresponds to what airport. Distance & Bearing to selected Airport

30 to 35 Waypoints reserved for CM-802AKG and C- Airport/Waypoint 51
(Senaki)
Selected Airport
(PP1 to PP4) targets (Pre-Planned Points) Heading Caret
AFD (Airfield Data) Sub-Page (List of Closest

Airports)
• DIS: Distance to Airport (nm)
• ALT: Airport Elevation (ft)
• ILS: Instrument Landing System Availability (Y = YES)
457
• TCN: TACAN Availability (Y = YES)
5
BINGO AIRPORT
The DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) has 9 Waypoints (DST 50 to 58) reserved for the closest airports to the last waypoint of your
THUNDER
flight plan. Think of them as alternate airports available for landing. These waypoints are entered in the DTC automatically by the
ground crew and cannot be edited. This list of airports is available on the AFD (Airfield Data) sub-page.
JF-17
Setting the MMS (Master Mode Switch) in the MIDDLE position (NAV) will automatically display the AFD (Airfield Data) sub-page,
which lists the closest airports.
Waypoint 59 is for the “BINGO” airport. The BINGO function determines what airport within your database (DST 50 to 58) is
the closest to you.
1. MMS (Master Mode Switch) – NAV 5

2. Press on RTN button to access the MAIN UFCP menu 3
4. Press Arrow next to BNG (BINGO)
5. Closest airport within the AFD page will be selected as your
current waypoint. In our case, DST 59 is selected. Distance & Bearing to BNG Airport
6. Steering cues on the HUD and HSD page can be used to navigate
towards the airport (see Waypoint Navigation tutorial).
BNG Airport
2
4
BNG Airport
(RP1 to RP6) 802AK missile steerpoints (Route Points) Heading Caret
AFD (Airfield Data) Sub-Page (List of Closest
40 SPI (Sensor Point of Interest) Coordinates Airports)
41 to 49 Reserved for Markpoints • DIS: Distance to Airport (nm)
50 to 58 Reserved waypoints for airfields closest to • BRG: Bearing to Airport
• ALT: Airport Elevation (ft)
• ILS: Instrument Landing System Availability (Y = YES) BNG Airport Data 458
59 Reserved waypoint for airfield (editable) • TCN: TACAN Availability (Y = YES)
APPROACH INTRODUCTION
There are three main approach types available in the JF-17:
THUNDER
• SCA: Self-Controlled Approach. This approach is basically a VFR (Visual Flight Rules) approach. This approach will
not give you any vertical deviation or lateral deviation information.
JF-17
• TACAN: This approach is done with a TACAN (Tactical Air Navigation) beacon installed at the airport. This
approach will not give you vertical deviation (glide slope) information; only lateral deviation from the course set Airport
to intercept the TACAN.
• ILS: This approach is done with an Instrument Landing System system, which consists of a glide slope station FAF (Final Approach Fix)
(provides vertical deviation from 3 deg descent) and a localizer array station (provides lateral deviation
information).
An approach usually consists four reference points:

• IAF (Initial Approach Fix), the point where the initial approach segment of an instrument approach begins. You
should be at a specific holding altitude at this point.
• IF (Intermediate Fix), fix that identifies the beginning of the intermediate approach segment of an instrument Aircraft
approach procedure. This point is usually not listed on charts.
• FAF (Final Approach Fix), specified point on a non-precision instrument approach which identifies the
commencement of the final segment.
• The Runway itself
Holding Altitude
(e.g. 4000 ft AGL)
3 deg
Runway
10 nm
IF (Intermediate Fix) FAF (Final Approach Fix)

Altitude 3000 ft AGL
459
IAF (Initial Approach Fix)
UFCP Main Menu
APPROACH INTRODUCTION
If you press the RTN button on the UFCP and select the Arrow button next to FP-A, you will enter the 1
THUNDER
UFCP Navigation Mode menu. From there, you can choose the Approach Menu and select what kind of
approach options to select.
JF-17
• ILS: ILS Approach 2

• TCN: TACAN Approach
• SCA: Self-Controlled Approach (VFR)
• FAF: Final Approach Fix sub-mode will guide you to the FAF. You can select the FAF for either available
runway.
• RWY: Runway sub-mode will guide you to the Runway selected with the ILS.
UFCP Navigation Mode Menu
Approach Page Approach Mode

and ILS Channel TACAN Station
ILS Magnetic Course TACAN Magnetic Course
Runway Magnetic Heading TACAN Minimum

Decision Altitude (ft)
ILS Glide Slope UFCP Approach Mode Menu Destination Airport Number
ILS Minimum
ILS/TCN/SCA Option
FAF (Final Approach Fix) Selector

10: distance in nm between FAF and Runway
SCA Minimum
L = Left / R = Right
FAF/RWY Option
Destination Airport Elevation
460
Destination Airport Coordinates
Destination Airport Number
ILS TUTORIAL ILS Channel Frequency ILS Channel Frequency
01 108.100 21 110.100
The DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) has 9 Waypoints (DST 50 to 58) reserved for the
THUNDER
closest airports to the last waypoint of your flight plan. Think of them as alternate 02 108.150 22 110.150
airports available for landing. These waypoints are entered in the DTC
03 108.300 23 110.300
JF-17
automatically by the ground crew and cannot be edited. This list of airports is
available on the AFD (Airfield Data) sub-page.
04 108.350 24 110.350
Setting the MMS (Master Mode Switch) in the MIDDLE position (NAV) will
automatically display the AFD (Airfield Data) sub-page, which lists the closest 05 108.500 25 110.500
airports.
ILS Channel 06 108.550 26 110.550
07 108.700 27 110.700
08 108.750 28 110.750
09 108.900 29 110.900
10 108.950 30 110.950
11 109.100 31 111.100
12 109.150 32 111.150
13 109.300 33 111.300
14 109.350 34 111.350
15 109.500 35 111.500
16 109.550 36 111.550
17 109.700 37 111.700
AFD (Airfield Data) Sub-Page (List of Closest Airports) 18 109.750 38 111.750
• DIS: Distance to Airport (nm) 19 109.900 39 111.900
• ALT: Airport Elevation (ft) 20 109.950 40 111.950
• ILS: Instrument Landing System Availability (Y = YES) 461
• TCN: TACAN Availability (Y = YES)
ILS TUTORIAL Kutaisi Airport
(DEST Waypoint 50)
We intend to land at Kutaisi’s Runway 08.
THUNDER
We will first follow the FAF (Final Approach Fix) to

JF-17
Runway 07, then turn towards the ILS for Runway 07.
The Destination Airport will be DEST Waypoint 50. FAF (Final Approach Fix)
You
Kutaisi Airport Data

(DEST Waypoint 50)
Kutaisi Airport
(DEST Waypoint 50)
AIRCRAFT HEADING 084
FAF (Final Approach Fix)

You
462
6b UFCP Main Menu
ILS TUTORIAL
The DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge) has 9 Waypoints 7 2
THUNDER
(DST 50 to 58) reserved for the closest airports to the 10

last waypoint of your flight plan. These waypoints are
JF-17
entered in the DTC automatically by the ground crew 11 9

3
and cannot be edited. This list of airports is available
on the AFD (Airfield Data) sub-page.
1. MMS (Master Mode Switch) – NAV

2. Press RTN to access UFCP MAIN Menu

4. Select APR (Approach) Mode. Left MFCD will 12
UFCP Navigation Mode Menu
automatically switch to the APPROACH page.
5. Select desired airport (i.e. Airport 50)
6. Press Arrow next to ILS to toggle between ILS, Kutaisi Airport
SCA and TACAN until you have ILS selected. (DEST Waypoint 50)
7. ILS Channel 18 on airport 50 will automatically be
selected. 4
8. Select FAF Approach Sub-Mode.
9. Set FAF (Final Approach Fix) setting to approach
from either the Left (L) or the Right (R).
10. Runway Heading 074 to runway 07 will FAF (Final Approach Fix)
automatically be set.
11. Magnetic Course 074 to runway 07 will
automatically be set.
12. Minimum Decision Altitude will automatically be
set to 220 ft. UFCP Approach Mode Menu 5 Destination Airport Number
AFD (Airfield Data) Sub-Page
(List of Closest Airports)
1
8
• UP: AA (Air-to-Air Intercept) 6a ILS/TCN/SCA Option FAF/RWY Option
463
ILS TUTORIAL
13. Set EFIS menu on the central MFCD.
THUNDER
14. Select OSB next to ILS to overlay Localizer and Glide Slope bars on the ADI (Attitude Director Indicator). Localizer Bar
15. Steer towards the waypoint by following the Navigation Tadpole and Selected Heading Caret. In the picture
JF-17
below, we need to steer right.

FAF Navigation Steering Cue

(Tadpole) 14
FAF Selected Heading Caret
Glide Slope Bar
Distance to FAF Current Heading
Bearing to FAF

time to FAF and current time

Approach Mode: ILS + FAF 50: Waypoint Number Selected
13.1: Distance to Waypoint (nm) Aircraft Position
464
FAF Heading Caret
ILS TUTORIAL
16. Once Navigation Tadpole is vertical and centered, you are on course towards the waypoint. The Selected Heading Caret should be lined up on your current heading.
THUNDER
17. Once approaching the FAF, the Glide Slope and Localizer bars should start moving on the HUD and EFIS.
18. Try to be above the FAF at an altitude of 3000 ft AGL (Above Ground Level). Consult the RA (Radar Altimeter) reading.
JF-17
Kutaisi Airport
(DEST Waypoint 50)
FAF Selected Heading Caret FAF Heading Caret

Localizer Bar
FAF Navigation Steering Cue
(Tadpole)
Radar Altimeter
Localizer Bar
Aircraft Position
Glide Slope Bar
Glide Slope Bar 465

ILS TUTORIAL
19. When you are less than 2 nm from the FAF, the Approach Mode will
THUNDER
automatically switch from FAF (Final Approach Fix) to RWY (Runway). You
will now be tracking the localizer and glide slope deviation bars on the
JF-17
HUD, EFIS and HSD.

20. Steer the aircraft to set the Localizer (Lateral Deviation) bar lined up with 19a 19b
the Flight Path Marker (or the green W on the EFIS ADI).
21. You can switch from MAG (Magnetic Heading) to TRU (True Heading) if
you want to double-check that the final heading is 074. Distance to ILS Aircraft Heading 21
Bearing to ILS
Localizer Reference Line

Flight Path Marker Shown: our aircraft (heading 076) is 2 deg
Localizer Bar to the RIGHT of the localizer line (074)
Glide Slope Bar
ILS Localizer Deviation
Reference (4 deg deviation) ILS Course
ILS Localizer Deviation

Glide Slope Bar

Localizer Bar Glide Slope Bar Localizer Bar
Aircraft Position
Approach Mode: ILS + RWY
ADI (Attitude Director

466
Indicator) W Reference
ILS TUTORIAL
22. Reduce throttle and control altitude to line up the Glide Slope
THUNDER
Bar with the Flight Path Marker (or the green W on the EFIS
ADI).
JF-17
23. Once you are set on the localizer and glide slope, slow down
using throttle and speed brakes,
24. Deploy flaps (TEF, Trailing Edge Flaps) and landing gear when
below 300 kts
24
25. Turn on LANDING Light (AFT)
26. Adjust power and trim to maintain an “On Speed” AoA (Angle
of Attack) of about 10 degrees. The Flight Path Marker should

remain within the “E” bracket on the HUD.
27. Use Radar Altitude as a reference.
25
24
22
36
E Bracket 22
467
ILS TUTORIAL
28. The aural cue “Altitude, Altitude, Altitude!” will be heard once you
THUNDER
reach the Minimum Decision Altitude (220 ft in our case. Aural signals
for Outer and Inner markers are also audible.
JF-17
29. Flare at 3 ft above ground level. The two main wheels should touch
the ground first.
30. During touchdown, maintain your Angle of Attack (10 deg) to perform
an aerobraking landing and set throttle to IDLE. This manoeuver will
bleed speed in the process (your wings will act as a huge airbrake).
31. When aircraft slows down to 135 kts, deploy drag chute by setting the
D/CH switch to DEPLOY (UP).

32. As the aircraft slows down, the nose gear will touch the ground by
itself. Gently apply brakes when aircraft airspeed is below 145 kts.
33. When airspeed is below 20 kts, jettison drag chute by setting the
D/CH switch to JETT (DOWN). For subsequent flights, the drag chute
will have to be installed again by the ground crew once re-arming and
re-fueling is performed.
31 33
468
REPAIRING AIRCRAFT
When a pilot ejects from the aircraft, the pilot should make sure that the aircraft gets every onboard data wiped out in case the aircraft crash does not destroy all sensitive information. This is why
THUNDER
the “Zeroizer” functions exists: to wipe the aircraft clean from every flight plan, armament information, countermeasure programs, etc.
JF-17
When repairing an aircraft, the ground crew needs to lift the seat. An “Ejection Seat Activate Zeroizer” switch set to ENABLE will automatically trigger the “Zeroizer” when the seat is ejected or lifted,
which is something you might not want if you want to go on another mission. To prevent the ground crew from triggering the Zeroizer when they lift the seat for repairs, the “Ejection Seat Activate
Zeroizer” must be set to DIsABLE. This way, the ground crew can do its job safely.
To repair an aircraft:
1. Set Ejection Seat Active Zeroizer Switch to DISABLE
2. Request repairs
3. When repairs are complete, set Ejection Seat Activate Zeroizer Switch back to ENABLE.
PART 18 – AIRCRAFT OPERATION TIPS
Ejection Seat Activate 1 3

Zeroizer Switch
Zeroizer (Self-Destruct) Button 469

REARMING & RESUPPLYING AIRCRAFT
If you land the aircraft and want to go for another sortie, you will have to request the ground crew
THUNDER
to re-install the drag chute and refill supplies like the oxygen bottle.
JF-17
1. To Refill Utilities (Drag Chute, Oxygen Bottles, etc.), contact ground crew by pressing « \ »
2. Press F8 (Ground Crew)
3. Press F9 (Refill Utilities).
470
DATA – RLS PAGE
One very cool thing to explore when returning from a mission lies in the DATA – RLS Sub-page. This pages stores the latest 10 ordnance release operations (including bombs, missiles, etc.).
THUNDER
JF-17
471
JF-17
PART 19 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING THUNDER
472
INTRODUCTION
AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING: WHY WE ALL HATE IT
THUNDER
Air-to-air refueling is one of the hardest, most hated, and most frustrating tasks in
JF-17
DCS. Ever. Of all time.
Why? Well, one of the main reasons for the difficulty behind refueling is the skill
required to do formation flying. Flying in formation with another aircraft requires
much more practice than you would initially think. Another reason is pure physics:
there is this thing called “wake turbulence”. An aircraft flies through a fluid: air. Just
like with any fluid, if you have something that displaces itself through it at a certain
speed, the fluid will become disrupted (turbulence). Wingtip vortices and jetwash are
both effects of this simple concept. Wake turbulence is the reason why airliners need
to wait a minimum time between takeoffs: flying through disrupted air will
destabilize the aircraft and it is unsafe, especially during critical phases of flight like
PART 19 – AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING
takeoff and landing.
Unfortunately, wake turbulence is something a pilot has to deal with during air-to-air
refueling. This is why the aircraft will fly just fine when approaching the tanker, but
start wobbling around when flying in close proximity of the refueling basket/drogue
and tanker engines.
473
TYPES OF AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING
There are four main air-to-air refueling techniques used in military aviation:
THUNDER
• Probe-and-drogue (refueling probe must be inserted in the tanker’s drogue basket)

• Flying Refueling Boom (guided by boom operator aboard the tanker)
• Buddy Refueling (two fighters can refuel one another independently without a tanker)
JF-17
• Nose-Probe refueling
Refueling Probe
Drogue Basket
Refueling Boom
F-105 Thunderchiefs being refueled by a Boom system during the Vietnam War Tornado GR4 being refueling by a Probe-and-Drogue system
474
TYPES OF AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING
The refueling aircraft available in DCS are:
THUNDER
• The Ilyushin Il-78M “Midas”, a russian probe-and-drogue tanker, which was developed from the Il-76.
• The Boeing KC-135 “Stratotanker”, a US Air Force flying boom tanker, which was developed from the Boeing 367-80.
• The KC-135 MPRS (Multi-point Refueling Systems), a US Air Force KC-135 tanker modified to add refueling pods to the KC-
JF-17
135's wings, making it useable as a probe-and-drogue tanker.

• The Lockheed S-3B “Viking”, a US Navy probe-and-drogue tanker.
• The Lockheed KC-130 “Hercules”, a USMC probe-and-drogue tanker, which was developed from the C-130.
The JF-17 is equipped with a Probe-and-Drogue system, so air-to-air refueling will only be performed from either an Il-78M, a Il-78M
KC-130, a KC-135 MPRS or a S-3B tanker.
KC-135 MPRS
KC-130
S-3B Viking
KC-135 Stratotanker 475

AIR-TO-AIR REFUELING DEMO
1. The first step in air-to-air refueling in the JF-17 starts from the ground prior to
THUNDER
engine start. If the refueling probe is not installed already, you have to request
the ground crew to install the air refueling probe. Contact ground crew by
JF-17
pressing « \ », then pressing F8 (Ground Crew), and F8 (AAR Probe) and F1 to

install the probe. This process can take about a minute or so. Probe Installed
Note: You can request the ground crew to install or uninstall the air refueling
probe. However, the engine needs to be shut down prior to doing that.
1a
1b
Probe Installed
1c
476
2. Consult mission briefing to know on which radio frequency/channel you need to
THUNDER
contact the tanker. In our case, we will use the preset radio Channel 01 on the COM1
radio.
JF-17
3. Find tanker using TACAN frequency as shown in the NAVIGATION - TACAN section.
4. Set your COM1 radio to Channel 01 and turn on volume knobs. Press “RALT+\” (T4
switch FWD) to communicate with TEXACO (tanker callsign).
5. Select Tanker – Texaco (F6) communication menu, and then select “Intent to Refuel”
6. TEXACO should give you a pre-contact altitude (in our case 6,000 ft).
Note: Some tankers like the KC-130 are equipped with a TACAN beacon, which can give
you a direction to find it easily. Just make sure you have the correct TACAN frequency
set in the A/A (Air-to-Air) Mode. Set TACAN using the NAVIGATION TACAN tutorial.
4
COM1 Channel 01 T4 Switch
5a • FWD: Radio PTT (Push-to-Talk) COMM1
• RALT+\
• RCTRL+\
5b
5c
Pre-contact information: 477

rendez-vous at 6,000 ft 6
7. Set Master Arm Switch – OFF (MIDDLE) 7
THUNDER
8. Set Air-to-Air Refueling Switch – ALL TANKS (FWD).

9. Set Air-to-Air Refueling Probe Light Switch – ON (FWD) if required.
JF-17
10. Set Air-to-Air Refueling Probe Light Brightness Control Knob – As required.
11. Set Exterior Lights Master Switch – NORM (FWD) if required.
8 Air-to-Air Refueling Switch

• ALL TANKS
• OFF
• INT (Internal Tanks Only)
10
9 Air-to-Air Refueling Light

11
478
12. When you are less than 0.1 nm away from tanker,
THUNDER
position yourself as shown on picture.

13. When in position, use your radio menu to select
JF-17
“Ready Pre-Contact” (F1).

14. The tanker’s pilot should answer you with “Cleared
Contact” and should deploy his drogue basket and
start to accelerate to cruising speed.
15. Fly formation with the tanker and approach the
drogue basket very slowly (make sure you remain
about 2-3 kts faster than the tanker) with very gentle
inputs. Use stick for big corrections, but keep
trimming constantly for small corrections.
16. Keep the aircraft trimmed at ALL TIMES. Approaching
untrimmed is living hell. Be careful with the throttle
since it has a long response time. Use airbrake if you

need to slow down quickly while maintaining altitude.
13
12
479
17. Insert your probe into the drogue basket by using your reference points. The Heads-Up Display’s upper section should be lined up vertically with
THUNDER
the left-most refueling pod for vertical movements, and your velocity vector should be aligned with the flap track fairing for lateral movements
18. Additional drag should be generated by the drogue once you have contact with the drogue: your aircraft will slightly decelerate. Throttle up a little
JF-17
to keep the probe in. Once the probe is taking fuel, the tanker pilot should tell you “You’re taking fuel” and a green light should illuminate on the
tanker’s refueling pod.
19. Keep formation with the tanker until your refueling is complete. Fuel state is visible on the heads-up display. Don’t look at the basket, look at the
tanker’s refueling pod.
Flap Track Fairing
Refueling Pod
Tanker’s Refueling Pod

Green light = You’re taking fuel.
Heads-Up Display
Upper Section
Use this vertical line as a reference

point for lateral movements
Velocity Vector
Fuel State (lbs)
480
KC-135 MPRS Visual References
20. When refueling is complete, detach your probe from the basket by throttling down and set Air-to-Air
THUNDER
Refueling Switch – OFF (MIDDLE).

JF-17
Note: Commander Steinsch has created a very nice list of visual references for various tankers such as the Il-78,
KC-130 and KC-135 MPRS.
See the pictures below, which are adapted from this video: https://youtu.be/uS-O8X1-CR4
Il-78 Visual References
KC-130 Visual References
481
Of course, all of this seems much easier said than done. You will very likely do
THUNDER
following mistakes:
•
JF-17
Approach too fast and miss the basket

• Oscillate vertically without being able to line up with the basket
• Keep going either too fast or too slow
• Drift left or right
• Overcompensate control inputs
• Forget the airbrake on
Here are various demos of air-to-air refueling.

• Tactical Pascale: https://youtu.be/cOOY66tLDek
• Commander Steinsch: https://youtu.be/uS-O8X1-CR4
• Tricker: https://youtu.be/TxOMvz6xzqM
The next slide will give you a couple of tips to help you catch that basket and slurp
that delicious jet fuel like a crack addict.
482
TIPS & TRICKS
• Remaining CALM is key for a successful refueling. If you lose your cool,
THUNDER
take a break and try again once you are relaxed. Silk hands and a clear
head are needed for that part.
• If you overshoot (or are about to fly past) the tanker, you can bleed
JF-17
speed very fast by deploying your airbrakes. You can go from 400 kts to
300 kts in a matter of seconds. Refueling Pod
• Avoid excessively rolling your aircraft while you are in contact with the
basket: you will change the orientation of your lift vector and it will
make you drift vertically and horizontally, which doesn’t help at all. Try
to stay in the same horizontal plane as much as possible.
• It is easier if you try to “break down” your control inputs in separate
movements. I try to avoid gunning my throttle excessively, pitching
up/down and using my rudder at the same time. The aircraft reacts in a
way that makes it all very difficult for your brain to predict and process.
I tend to make sure my plane is straight and level at first and that I am
more or less lined up with the refueling pod.
• Once I have a satisfying attitude and that the refueling pod is placed as Flap Track Fairing Refueling Pod
per the reference points (vertically: the upper part of the HUD glass is
lined up with refueling pod, and laterally: the velocity vector is lined up
with the flap track fairing near the refueling pod), I gradually throttle Heads-Up Display
up and increase speed to match the tanker’s speed. Upper Section
• Avoid big throttle movements as the JF-17 engine power can fluctuate
rapidly and throw you past the tanker. Use this vertical line as a reference
• Once my speed matches the tanker’s, I can gradually accelerate to a point for lateral movements
speed that is 2-3 kts faster, approaching the basket very slowly. At that
part, the ONLY two things I am watching are my airspeed and the flap
track fairing being lined up with the velocity vector (NOT THE
BASKET). Nothing else matters.
• Once I am approaching the basket, I make sure to avoid inducing
significant rolling motions while displacing myself mostly with rudder
and the vertical stick input. It is acceptable to gently roll to move Velocity Vector
laterally, but keep in mind that this can induce a change in altitude if
you are not careful. You can fine-tune your vertical attitude with your
stick and adjust airspeed by gently moving the throttle.
483
JF-17
PART 20 – OTHER RESOURCES THUNDER
ABBREVIATIONS
484
JF-17
PART 20 – OTHER RESOURCES THUNDER
ABBREVIATIONS
485
USEFUL RESOURCES
Deka Ironwork Tutorials Playlist (Youtube)
THUNDER
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OeHtlV-Z0fo&list=PLpEU7kYTYExgrub0_lhoq4neVV6QzRXlD
JF-17
Jabbers JF-17 Start-Up (Youtube)

https://youtu.be/3__K3lTt4hw
Redkite JF-17 Pre-Release Preview (Youtube)

https://youtu.be/hVN4U5qf-rs
Redkite JF-17 WMD-7 Targeting Pod Tutorial (Youtube)

https://youtu.be/Wlylh2AZ6EY
Redkite JF-17 BRM-1 Laser guided Rockets and GBU laser guided Bombs Tutorial (Youtube)
PART 20 – OTHER RESOURCES
https://youtu.be/qyKtfZHijZg
Growling Sidewinder JF-17 BVR Fight SD-10 Capabilities (Youtube)

https://youtu.be/AtwKkNr5AMs
Grim Reapers JF-17 Tutorials Playlist (Youtube)

https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7eoLZTelbYE&list=PL3kOAM2N1YJfX0JgLClesrw6SXUrv0isl
Pakistan Defence Documentary - JF-17 Thunder Program: Affordable Air Power (Youtube)
https://youtu.be/3HhuSmSE1vI
JF-17.com Website
http://www.jf-17.com/
486
THANK YOU TO ALL MY PATRONS
Creating these guides is no easy task, and I would like to take the time to properly thank every single one of my Patreon supporters. The following people have donated a very generous
amount to help me keep supporting existing guides and work on new projects as well:
• JW
• Dale Henken
• ChazFlyz
• Dylan Weathers
487
488

DCS JF-17 Thunder Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DCS JF-17 Thunder Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DCS JF-17 Thunder Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DCS GUIDE

JF-17 THUNDER BLOCK 1

To assign axis, click on Axis Assign. You can also

To modify curves and sensitivities of axes, click

• PITCH (DEADZONE AT 1, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 5)

• ROLL (DEADZONE AT 1, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 5)

• RUDDER (DEADZONE AT 0, SATURATION X AT 100, SATURATION Y AT 100, CURVATURE AT 0)

• THRUST – CONTROLS ENGINE RPM

• TDC SLEW HORIZONTAL

• TDC SLEW VERTICAL

• T6_AXIS VERTICAL ANTENNA

• WHEEL BRAKE LEFT / RIGHT

S6 UP – Trim Nose DOWN

S3: Weapon Release

S4: Fire Main Gun

S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. FWD T4 FWD – Radio COMM1

S1 (Sensor Selection) Sw. RIGHT S T2 PRESS (PL-E5 CAGE/UNCAGE)

T3 AFT – Speed Brake OFF T1 BACK (MMS AG)

T2 AFT – Countermeasures Dispense

+ TOE BRAKES (MAPPED ON PEDALS) 11

Canopy Open/Close Handle

Canopy Closed & Sealed Mark

Canopy Close Mark

Formation Light Selector Knob

Anti-Collision/Tow Light Switch

Anti-Collision Light Selector Knob

Navigation (Position) Lights Mode

Navigation (Position) Lights DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge)

Air-to-Air Refueling Probe Light DTC (Data Transfer Cartridge)

COM1 Radio Volume Control Knob ECS (Environmental Control

ACP: Audio Control Panel

TCN/ILS (TACAN/Instrument Landing

Landing Gear Override Handle

Air Temperature Control Selector

INS (Inertial Navigation

System) Mode Knob Selector

• FAST (Quick Alignment) Symbology Reject/Declutter Switch

AAP (Avionics Activation Panel) Buttons

HMD SPJ CLDP IRST

RDR SLNK OESP RWR

COM1 COM2 NAV IFF

INS WMMC1 WMMC2 SAIU

Legend: COMBAT TRAIN

Blue buttons are activated automatically when

Oxygen Flow Indicator

Oxygen Indicator Brightness Knob

Warning Panel Test Button

Main AC Generator Switch

AIR DATA LOW FUEL CABIN PRESS REDUCE RPM

CONFIG FUEL PUMP AC SYS OIL

DL START PUMP DC GEN STARTER

FCS 3 BRAKE BATT ENG TEMP

FCS 1 NWS STATIC INV ANTI-ICING

ROLL CAS ECS EMMC SEC

YAW CAS EQUIP HOT LWC EDU

AUTOPILOT PITOT HEAT AVIONS DEEC

Emergency Pneumatic System

ON/OFF Switch Clock Brightness

CHR (Chronometer) / Stopwatch Button

• Second Press: Starts chronometer/stopwatch